wc5022-5024 User Guide En-Us

February 2015
Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024

Multifunction Printer
User Guide
2014 Xerox Corporation. All rights reserved. Xerox, Xerox and Design, CentreWare, and WorkCentre are trademarks of Xerox
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows XP, Windows Vista, and Windows 7 are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
Document version 2.0: February 2015
BR8824
Contents
1
Before Using the Machine

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Types of Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Using this Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Organization of this Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Safety Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Machine Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Operational Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Location of Warning and Caution Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11
Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Radio Frequency Emissions (Class A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Product Safety Certification (UL, CB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
About Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
JPEG Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Libcurl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
FreeBSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
ICC Profile (Little cms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
WIDE DHCP Client. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
MD5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
Legal Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16
Environment Settings
Supported Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Print Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Scan Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Fax Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Interface Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Using the USB Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Using the Ethernet Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Setting the Network Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Setting the Machine's IP Address (IPv4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Setting the Machine's IP Address (IPv6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
When Using the Printer Setup Utility for Setting the IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Activating the Communication Port To Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 Multifunction Printer

User Guide
iii
Contents
Setting the Send E-mail Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

SMTP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
E-mail Header and Body Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Using Xerox CentreWare Internet Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Xerox CentreWare Internet Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Supported Environments and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Starting Xerox CentreWare Internet Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Setting Items on Xerox CentreWare Internet Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Properties Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Support Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Address Book Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Installing the Print Driver/Scan Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Installing the Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Installing the Scan Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Uninstalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Product Overview
Machine Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Front, Left Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Right Side, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Inside. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Switching the Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Switching the Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Energy Saver Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Entering the Energy Saver Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Exiting Energy Saver Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Using Quick-Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
About Icons on the Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
About the Default Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Setting the Default Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Account Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Types of Account Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Setting the Options Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Loading Paper
Paper Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Supported Paper Weights and Sheet Counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Supported Paper Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Unusable Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Storing and Handling Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
iv

User Guide
Contents
Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Changing Paper Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Changing the Paper Size for Trays 1 to 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Changing the Paper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Copy
Copying Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Placing the Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Advanced Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Entering the Number of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Starting the Copy Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
About Auto Rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Operations Performed While Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Stopping a Copy Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Checking Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
ID Card Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Advanced Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Lighten/Darken. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Original Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
2 Sided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Collate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Paper Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Reduce/Enlarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Pages per Side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Original Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Original - Binding Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Output - Binding Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Edge Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Managing the Copy Paper with Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Operations when Using the Copy Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Checking the Total Number of Impressions Copied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Fax
Overview of Fax Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Placing a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Specifying the Recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Making Advanced Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Starting the Fax Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Operations During Faxing (Sending) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Canceling the Fax Being Sent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Checking Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Operations During Faxing (Receiving) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Canceling the Fax Being Received . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11

User Guide
Contents
Using the Control Panel Buttons to Specify the Fax Recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Using the Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Using the One Touch Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Using the Address Book Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Using the Speed Dial Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16
Advanced Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Original Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Lighten/Darken. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
Original Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-20
Send Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21
Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-21
2 Sided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-22
Edge Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-23
ECM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-23
Off Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24
Delayed Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-25
Sending/Receiving Faxes Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-26
Receipt of Faxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-28
Sending a Fax Directly from your Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29
Sending a Direct Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29
Scan
Scanning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Placing the Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Using the Scan Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Using an Application to Load Scan Data from the Machine via USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Sending Scan Data to PC as E-mail Attachment - E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Sending Scan Data to PC over Network - PC (Network). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Operations During Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Canceling the Current Scan Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Checking Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Advanced Scanner Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Lighten/Darken. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Original Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
2 Sided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Color Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Original Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
Print
Major Print Driver Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Operations During Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Stopping the Print Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
vi

User Guide
Contents
Tools
System Settings Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Entering System Administration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Changing the Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Exiting System Administration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
List of Tools Menu Items Displayed in System Administration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Default Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
ID Card Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Device Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Tray Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
Custom Paper Size Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Control Panel Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Default Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Phone Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
Wired Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
IP Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Background Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Back. Suppression Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Reduce/Enlarge Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Auto Collate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Background Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Back. Suppression Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Image Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Edge Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Maximum Attachment Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Recipient Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33

User Guide
vii
Contents
Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34

Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Fax Answer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Tel/Fax Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Line Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Dial Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Call Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Redial Attempts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Redial Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Junk Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Send Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Company Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Fax Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Forward. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Auto Reduce On Receipt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Border Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Receive Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Print Size (Received Letter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Immediate Fax Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Off Hook Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39
Transmission Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Broadcast Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Protocol Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Power Saver Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Auto Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Auto Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Idle Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
Job Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
Audio Tones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46
Job History Verbose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48
Auto Paper Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48
User Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48
Paper Size Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49
Show Toner Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49
Show Drum Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49
Show Drum Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50
Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51
System Administrator Passcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51
User Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52
Confirm/Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52
Reset Copied Impressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
viii

User Guide
Contents
10 Machine Status
Checking Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
Selecting Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Checking the Machines IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
Checking the Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Printing Reports/Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
Notification Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
ID Card Guidance Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Quick-Button Selection Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
11 Job Status
Checking Current/Pending Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-1
Checking Reserved Fax Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-1
Canceling the Current Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3
Canceling a Pending Fax Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-4
12 Maintenance
Replacing Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Replacing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
Replacing the Drum Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-7
Cleaning the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Cleaning the Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Cleaning the Document Cover and the Document Glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Cleaning the Document Presser and the Narrow Glass Strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Cleaning the Document Feeder Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
13 Problem Solving
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-1
Machine Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-2
Image Quality Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6
Copying Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Unable to Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Copy Output Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Printer Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Unable to Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Print Output Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Fax Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Problems When Sending Faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Problems When Receiving Faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

User Guide
ix
Contents
Scan Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unable to Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unable to Load Scan Data to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unable to Send Scan Data in E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unable to Forward a Scan Document on the Network (SMB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scan Image Quality Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Related Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problems Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port9100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problems Using Xerox CentreWare Internet Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problems With E-mail Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internet/Intranet Connection Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPv4 or IPv6 Connection Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Jam in Left Cover A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Jam in One Tray Module Cover B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Jam in Two Tray Module Cover C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Jams in Tray 1 to 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Jams in the Tray 5 (Bypass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Document Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-20
13-20
13-20
13-21
13-22
13-23
13-25
13-25
13-26
13-27
13-27
13-29
13-32
13-45
13-48
13-50
13-51
13-52
13-53
13-54
14 Appendix
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-1
Basic Functions/Copy Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Print Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Scan Functions (Local)*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Scan Functions (Network)*1 (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-7
Fax Functions (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-8
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-8
Duplex Output Unit (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-9
One Tray Module (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-9
Two Tray Module (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-9
Printable Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Optional Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Notes and Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Copy Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Print Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Scan Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Fax Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Notes and Restrictions when Connecting to Internet or Intranet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Notes and Restrictions when Operating from Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Notes and Restrictions for Using SMB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
Notes and Restrictions for Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port9100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
Notes and Restrictions for IPv6 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18

User Guide
Contents
Fax Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19

Sent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
Received . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I-1

User Guide
xi
Contents
xii

User Guide
Before Using the

Machine
This chapter describes how to use this guide, as well as safety notes and legal notice you should read
before using the machine.
Preface
Thank you for selecting the WorkCentre 5022/5024 (hereafter referred to as "the machine").
This guide describes how to operate the machine and the precautions you should follow during
operation. To get the most out of the machine and to use it effectively, be sure to read this guide
before use.
This guide assumes that you have a basic knowledge of the operating environment of the personal
computer in use and networking environments. For information on the environment of the personal
computer in use and the basic knowledge and operations of networking environments, refer to the
manuals provided with the personal computer, operating system, and network system.
After reading this guide, be sure to keep it handy for quick reference. It will be useful in case you forget
how to perform operations or if a problem occurs with the machine.
WARNING: This equipment will be inoperable when the main power fails.

User Guide
1-1
Types of Manuals
The following guides are provided with the machine.
User Guide (this guide) (Driver CD Kit)
The guide describes how to use the copy, print, fax and scan features as well as how to set the paper,
perform everyday maintenance, make machine status settings, perform troubleshooting, and set up a
network.
Basic Operation Guide (Booklet) (Driver CD Kit)
The guide describes a quick reference for the basic operations, daily maintenance, and problem solving
for this machine.
Manual (HTML)
The manual describes installation and configuration procedures for print drivers and the printer
environment. This manual is included in the Driver CD Kit.
Print Driver Help
The help describes print features and operations.
1-2

User Guide
Using this Guide

This guide is intended for first time users of the machine. It describes the basic operations for the copy,
fax, scan, and print features.
Organization of this Guide

This guide consists of the following chapters:
1 Before Using the Machine: Describes how to use this guide and provides license information.
2 Environment Settings: Describes the environment required to operate the machine.
3 Product Overview: Describes the names of the machine parts as well as basic operations, such as how
to turn the machine on and off, how to use the energy saver feature, and how to use Xerox
CentreWare Internet Services.
4 Loading Paper: Describes the types of paper and other media that you can use on the machine and
how to load paper in a tray.
5 Copy: Describes the basic operation and features of the copy feature.
6 Fax: Describes the basic operations and features for the Fax services.
7 Scan: Describes the basic operations and features of the scan feature.
8 Print: Describes the basic printing operations.
9 Tools: Describes System Administration mode as well as how to change the default settings.
10 Machine Status: Describes how to check the faults that occurred in the machine and to print various
reports.
11 Job Status: Describes how to check job status and how to delete jobs.
12 Maintenance: Describes how to replace consumables and to clean the machine.
13 Problem Solving: Describes troubleshooting procedures to solve the problems with the machine.
14 Appendix: Describes the specifications of the machine, optional accessories, and
cautions/restrictions.
Conventions
The screen shots and illustrations used in this guide vary depending on the machine configuration
and optional components installed. Some of the items in the screen shots may not be displayed or
available depending on your machine configuration.
The procedures in this guide may vary depending on the driver and utility software being used
due to the upgrades.
In this document, "Computer" refers to a personal computer or workstation.

User Guide
1-3
The following terms are used in this guide:

Important: Important infomation that you should read.
Note: Additional information on operations or features.
The following symbols are used in this guide:
"
"
A cross-reference included in this guide.

Names of CD-ROM, features, and screen messages and input text.
Folders, files, applications, button or menu names displayed on the

screen.
Names of menus, commands, windows, or dialog boxes displayed on
the computer screen and their buttons and menu names.
<
>
button
Hardware buttons on the control panel.
<
>
key
Keys on the keyboard of the computer.
Path to a certain item within a procedure on the control panel.

For example: When you see the procedure "select Tools > Default
Settings > Copy", this means that you need to select Tools, select
Default Settings, and then select Copy.
Path to a certain item within a procedure on a computer.
For example: When you see the procedure "to search for files and
folders, click Start > Search > For Files or Folders", this means that
you need to click Start, click Search, and then click For Files or
Folders to search for files and folders.
>
1-4
Orientation of documents or paper is described in this guide as follows:

, ,
Long Edge Feed (LEF)
Loading the document or paper in portrait orientation when

viewed from the front of the machine.
, ,
Short Edge Feed (SEF):
Loading the document or paper in landscape orientation when

viewed from the front of the machine.
LEF Orientation
SEF Orientation
Feed direction
Feed direction

User Guide
Safety Notes
Before using this product, read "Safety Notes" carefully for safety use.
This product and recommended supplies have been tested and found to comply with strict safety
requirements including safety agency approvals and compliance with environmental standards. Follow
the following instructions for safety use.
Note Any unauthorized alteration including an addition of new functions or connection to external
devices may not be covered by the product warranty. Contact your local Xerox representative for more
information.
Follow all warning instructions marked on this product. The following symbols are used to indicate
danger of personal injury or machine damage:
DANGER:
High risk of severe or fatal injury if not followed

strictly.
WARNING:
Risk of severe or fatal injury if not followed

strictly.
CAUTION:
Risk of injury to user or damage to machine if

not followed strictly.
Electrical Safety
This product must be operated by a power source as indicated on the machine's data plate. Consult
your local power company to check if your power source meets the requirements.
WARNINGS:
Connect this product to a protective earth circuit.
This product is supplied with a plug that has a protective earth pin. The plug fits only into an
earthed electrical outlet. This is a safety feature. If the plug doesn't fit to the outlet, contact an
electrician to replace the outlet to avoid risk of electric shock. Never use an earthed adapter plug
to connect the product to the electrical outlet that has no earth connection terminal.
Improper connection of a grounding conductor may cause electric shock.
Plug the power cord directly into a grounded electrical outlet. To prevent overheat and a fire
accident, do not use an extension cord, a multi-plug adaptor or a multiple connector. Consult your
local Xerox representative to check if an outlet is grounded.
Connect this product to a branch circuit or an outlet that has larger capacity than the rated
ampere and voltage of this product. See the data plate on the rear panel of this product for its
rated ampere and voltage.
Never touch the power cord with wet hands. It may cause electric shock.

User Guide
1-5
Do not place any object on the power cord.

Always keep the plug connection free of dust. A dusty or damp environment may cause a minute
electric current in a connector. It may generate heat and eventually cause a fire.
To avoid the risk of electric shock and fire, use only the power cord supplied with this product or a
cord designated by Xerox.
The power cord is for use with this product exclusively. Do not use it with any other product.
Do not damage or alter the power cord. Damage and alteration may generate heat and
eventually cause electric shock or fire.
If the power cord is damaged or insulated wires are exposed, contact your local Xerox representative
for a replacement. Do not use a damaged or uninsulated cord to avoid the risk of electric shock and
fire.
CAUTIONS:
When cleaning this product, always switch off and unplug it. Access to a live machine interior may
cause electric shock.
Do not plug in or unplug this product with the switch in the On position. Plugging and unplugging
a live connector may deform the plug and generate heat, and eventually cause a fire.
Hold the plug, not the cord, when unplugging this product, or it may damage the cord and cause
electric shock or fire.
Always switch off and unplug the machine when it (i.e., fax function) is not used over weekends or
long holidays. Failure to do so may cause deterioration of the insulation and eventually electric
shock or fire.
Note The machine cannot receive fax messages when the power is off.
Once a month, switch off this product and check the following:
the power cord is plugged firmly into an electrical outlet
the plug is not excessively heated, rusted or bent
the plug and electrical outlet are free of dust
the power cord is not cracked or worn down
If you notice any unusual condition, switch off and unplug this product first and contact your local
Xerox representative.
1-6

User Guide
Machine Installation
WARNING: Do not locate this product where people might step on or trip over the power cord.
Friction or excessive pressure may generate heat and eventually cause electric shock or a fire
accident.
CAUTIONS:
Never locate this product in the following places:
Near radiators or any other heat sources
Near volatile flammable materials such as curtains
In the hot, humid, dusty or poorly ventilated environment
In the place receiving direct sunlight
Near cookers or humidifiers
This product weighs 81.6 lbs./37 kg. Always use a team of two persons to avoid mishandling or
injury when lifting this product: one to hold the bottom of the folded bypass tray on the left side
of the product and the other one to hold the handhold provided on the right side of the product.
Never lift it by gripping any other areas. It will prevent you from dropping the product and getting
back ache or injuries.
Locate this product on a level and sturdy surface that can withstand its weight. Otherwise, if tilted,
the product may fall over and cause injuries.
Locate this product in a well-ventilated area. Do not obstruct the ventilation openings of the
product.

User Guide
1-7
Keep the minimum clearance indicated below for ventilation and access to the power plug. Unplug the
product if an abnormal condition is noted.
With Duplex Automatic Document Feeder
1100.9
325.9
595
100
400
387
1474.6
587.6
100
80
(Unit: mm)
WARNINGS:
Do not tilt the product at an angle of more than 10 degrees. Otherwise, it may fall over and cause
injury.
front
front
back
10
1-8
left
left
back
right
right
10 10
10

User Guide
Always lock the wheels of this product after installation. Otherwise, it may fall over or slide and
cause injury
CAUTION: To bundle wires and cables, always use the cable ties and spiral tubes supplied by
Xerox.
Other Notices
To keep this product in a good performance and condition, always use it in the following
environment:
Temperature: 50 - 90 F (10 - 32 C)
Humidity: 35 - 85%
When the product is left in a chilly room and the room is rapidly warmed up by heater, dew
condensation may form inside the product and cause a partial deletion on printing.
Operational Safety
WARNINGS:
The operator's product maintenance procedures are described in the customer documentation
supplied with this product. Do not carry out any other maintenance procedures not described in
the documentation.
This product is equipped with a safety feature that prohibits access to hazardous areas. The areas
are isolated by covers or protectors that require a tool to remove. To prevent electric shock and
injury, never remove these covers and protectors.
To avoid the risk of electric shock and fire, switch off and unplug the product promptly in the
following conditions, then contact your local Xerox representative.
The product emits smoke or its surface is unusually hot
The product emits unusual noise or odor
The power cord is cracked or worn down
A circuit breaker, fuse, or any other safety device becomes activated
Any liquid is spilled into the product
The product is soaked in water
Any part of the product is damaged

User Guide
1-9
Do not insert any object into slots or openings of this product.

Do not put any of the following items on the product:
Liquid container such as flower vases or coffee cups
Metal parts such as staples or clips
Heavy objects
If liquid is spilled over or metal parts are slipped into the product, it may cause electric shock or
fire.
Do not use conductive paper such as carbon paper or conductively-coated paper. When a paper
jam occurs, it may short-circuit the machine and eventually cause a fire.
CAUTIONS:
Keep electrical and mechanical safety interlocks active. Keep the safety interlocks away from
magnetic materials. Magnetic materials may accidentally activate the product and cause injury or
electric shock.
Do not attempt to remove paper that is deeply jammed inside the machine, particularly if it is
wrapped around the fusing unit or the heat roller. Doing so may cause injury or burns. Switch off
the product immediately and contact your local Xerox representative.
Do not apply excessive force to hold a thick document on the document glass. It may break the
glass and cause injury.
Ventilate well during extended operation or mass copying. Inadequate ventilation may affect the
office air environment with an ozone odor.
Provide proper ventilation to ensure a comfortable and safe environment.
Consumables
WARNINGS:
Store all consumables in accordance with the instructions given on its package or container.
Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off spilled toner. Never use a vacuum cleaner for spills. Doing
so increases the risk of fire and explosion from electric sparks igniting inside the vacuum cleaner.
If you spill a large volume of toner, contact your local Xerox representative.
Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Remaining toner in the cartridge may catch fire
and cause burn injury or explosion.
If you have a used toner cartridge no longer needed, contact your local Xerox representative for its
disposal.
1-10
CAUTIONS:
Keep drum cartridges and toner cartridges out of the reach of children. If a child accidentally
swallows toner, spit it out, rinse mouth with water, drink water and consult a physician
immediately.

User Guide
When replacing drum cartridges and toner cartridges, be careful not to spill the toner. In case of
any toner spills, avoid contact with clothes, skin, eyes and mouth as well as inhalation.
If you get toner particles in your eyes, wash it out with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes until
the irritation is gone. Consult a physician if necessary.
If you inhale toner particles, move to a fresh air location and rinse your mouth with water.
If you swallow toner, spit it out, rinse your mouth with water, drink plenty of water and consult a
physician immediately.
When removing the fusing unit, always switch it off first and wait for 40 minutes until it cools.
Location of Warning and Caution Labels

Always follow all warning instructions marked on or supplied with this product.
WARNING: To avoid the risk of burn injury and electric shock, never touch the area with the "High
Temperature" or "High Voltage" indicators.
Caution label
Warning label

User Guide
1-11
Regulations
Radio Frequency Emissions (Class A)
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class A digital device, pursuant
to International Standard for Electromagnetic Interference (CISPR Publ. 22) and Radiocommunication
Act 1992 in Australia/New Zealand. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the product is operated in a commercial environment. This product
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the customer documentation, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this product in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
user is required to correct the interference at their own expense.
Changes and modifications to this product not specifically approved by Xerox may void the user's
authority to operate this equipment.
Product Safety Certification (UL, CB)

This product is certified by the following agency using the safety standards listed.
Agency: TUV
Standard: IEC60950-1:ed. 2
Environment
For environmental protection and efficient use of resources, Xerox recycles returned toner cartridges to
manufacture parts and materials, or for energy recovery.
Proper disposal is required for used toner cartridges and drum cartridges. Do not open toner cartridge
containers. Return them to your local Xerox representative.
About Licenses
This section describes information about licenses. Be sure to read it thoroughly.
JPEG Code
Our printer software uses some of the codes defined by the Independent JPEG Group.
1-12

User Guide
Libcurl
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2006, Daniel Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>.
All rights reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is
hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all
copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF
OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or
otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written
authorization of the copyright holder.
FreeBSD
This product contains the part of FreeBSD codes.
The FreeBSD Copyright

Copyright 1994-2006 The FreeBSD Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.

User Guide
1-13
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE FREEBSD PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE FREEBSD PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The views and conclusions contained in the software and documentation are those of the authors and
should not be interpreted as representing official policies, either expressed or implied, of the FreeBSD
Project.
ICC Profile (Little cms)

Little cms copyright (c) 1988-2004 Marti Maria
WIDE DHCP Client

WIDE Project DHCP Implementation
Copyright (c) 1995 Akihiro Tominaga
Copyright (c) 1995 WIDE Project
All rights reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation is hereby granted,
provided only with the following conditions are satisfied:
1. Both the copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software,
derivative works or modified versions, and any portions thereof, and that both notices appear in
supporting documentation.
2. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by WIDE Project and its contributors.
3.
1-14
Neither the name of WIDE Project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

User Guide
Feedback of the results generated from any improvements or extensions made to this software would
be much appreciated.
Any such feedback should be sent to:
Akihiro Tominaga
WIDE Project
Keio University, Endo 5322, Kanagawa, Japan
(E-mail: dhcp-dist@wide.ad.jp)
WIDE project has the rights to redistribute these changes.
MD5
Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data Security,
Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this
function.
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as
"derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning
or referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this
software or the suitability of this software for any particular purpose.
It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.

User Guide
1-15
Legal Notice
Copying or printing certain documents may be illegal in your country. Fines or imprisonment may be
imposed on those found guilty. The following are examples of items that may be illegal to copy or print
in your country.
Currency
Banknotes and checks
Bank and government bonds and securities
Passports and identification cards
Copyright material or trademarks without the consent of the owner
Postage stamps and other negotiable instruments
This list is not inclusive and no liability is assumed for either its completeness or accuracy. In case of
doubt, contact your legal counsel.
1-16

User Guide
Supported Environment
This section describes the environment settings needed to use the machine's print and scan features.
Print Feature
The machine can be connected directly to a computer for use as a local printer. Connect the machine
to a computer with a USB cable.
Local connection
USB
Network Connection
LPD / Port9100
Use as a Local Printer

Connect the machine to a computer with a USB cable.
Use as a Network Printer
Print from network-connected computers using the TCP/IP protocol.
To use the machine as a network printer, you need to activate the port to use for printing.
LPD: Activate this setting when using the LPD port.
Port9100: Activate this setting when using the Port9100 port.
Note This feature is available when the Network Kit is installed.
For information on how to set TCP/IP, refer to Setting the Network Environment on page 2-6.
For information on how to activate a communication port, refer to Activating the Communication Port
To Use on page 2-11.

User Guide
2-1
Scan Feature
The machine supports the following Scan functions:
Using the USB connection

Scan with PC application
Uses the USB connection to import scan data in a computer with a TWAIN or Windows Imaging
Acquisition (WIA) compatible application.
To use this function, you must install the scan driver from the Driver CD Kit CD-ROM.
Note To install the scan driver, follow the instructions provided in the manual (HTML file) included on
the CD-ROM.
For information on how to use this feature, refer to Using an Application to Load Scan Data from the
Machine via USB on page 7-6.
Using the Network connection

Scan to E-mail
Uses the SMTP protocol to send the document scanned by the machine as an e-mail attachment.
To send scanned data as an e-mail attachment, you must activate the SMTP port.
(Setting at the time of factory shipment: Enabled)
This function is also used to set the e-mail header and body and SMTP server settings used when emails are sent as well as the recipient address (system administrator's e-mail address) for e-mail
notification when a transmission error occurs.
For information on how to activate the SMTP port, refer to Activating the Communication Port To Use
on page 2-11.
For information on how to set the SMTP server, refer to SMTP Server Settings on page 2-13.
For information on how to enter the header and body of an e-mail, refer to E-mail Header and Body
Settings on page 2-14.
For information on how to set the system administrator's e-mail address, refer to Administrator's Email Address on page 2-21.
For information on how to use this feature, refer to Sending Scan Data to PC as E-mail Attachment - Email on page 7-7.
Scan to PC (Network)
Uses the SMB protocol to save the document scanned by the machine in a common folder created on a
network PC.
To save scanned data on a computer, you must activate the SMB port.
2-2

User Guide
(Setting at the time of factory shipment: Enabled)

For information on how to activate the SMB port, refer to Activating the Communication Port To Use on
page 2-11.
For information on how to use this feature, refer to Sending Scan Data to PC over Network - PC
(Network) on page 7-10.
Fax Feature
The machine supports the following communication networks for fax transmissions:
Public switched telephone network (PSTN)
Private branch exchanges (PBX)
You must also make settings in Region and Clock to use the Fax functions on this machine.
Note This option is available when the Fax Kit is installed.
For information on how to make the region setting, refer to Region on page 9-38.
For information on how to make the clock settings, refer to Clock on page 9-43.

User Guide
2-3
Interface Cables
When connecting the machine directly to a computer, use a USB interface. When connecting the
machine to a network, use an Ethernet interface.
Using the USB Interface

The machine supports the USB 1.1/2.0 interface.
To connect the USB cable:
1. Press the power switch to the Off position to turn the power off.
Note Check that the display is off.

2.
Connect a USB cable to the USB 1.1/2.0 interface connector.
3.
4.
Connect the other end of the USB cable to the computer.

Press the power switch to the On position to turn the power on.
2-4

User Guide
Using the Ethernet Interface

The machine supports 100BASE-TX and 10BASE-T Ethernet interfaces.
Note The Ethernet interface connector is available when the Network Kit is installed on the machine.
To connect the Ethernet interface:
1. Press the power switch to the Off position to turn the power off.
Note Check that the display is off.

2.
Connect a network cable to the Ethernet interface connector.
Note Prepare a network cable suitable for your network connection. When you replace the network
cable, contact our Customer Support Center.
3.
Press the power switch to the On position to turn the power on.

User Guide
2-5
Setting the Network Environment

This section describes how to make the settings needed to use the TCP/IP protocol.
The machine supports IPv6 addresses in an IPv6 network environment. For more information, refer to
Setting the Machine's IP Address (IPv6) on page 2-7.
Setting the Machine's IP Address (IPv4)

To use the TCP/IP protocol, you must set the machine's IP address.
By default, the machine is set to obtain its IP address automatically.
This setting automatically sets the machine's IP address when the machine is connected to a network
containing a DHCP server.
Print the System Settings Report to check whether the machine's IP address has already been set.
You can also check the IP address in the following methods:
On the Machine Status screen
Using the Tools menu items
Using Xerox CentreWare Internet Services
For information on how to print the System Settings Report, refer to Printing Reports/Lists on page 107.
For information on how to check on the Machine Status screen, refer to Checking the Machines IP
Address on page 10-5.
For information on how to check using Tools, refer to TCP/IP on page 9-27.
For information on how to check using Xerox CentreWare Internet Services, refer to TCP/IP
(Connectivity > Protocols) on page 2-22.
If the machine's IP address has not been set, set the IP address by using the Printer Setup Utility for
Setting IP Address included in the Driver CD Kit or using the control panel to change the Get IP
Address setting to Control Panel.
Notes
If the network has a DHCP server, the machine's IP address may be changed, so check the address
periodically.
The machine can acquire address information automatically by using a BOOTP or RARP server. To
use a BOOTP or RARP server to acquire the machine's IP address, use the control panel to change
the Get IP Address setting to BOOTP or RARP.
For information on how to use the Printer Setup Utility for Setting IP Address, refer to When Using the
Printer Setup Utility for Setting the IP Address on page 2-7.
For information on how to set the IP address from the control panel, refer to TCP/IP on page 9-27.
2-6

User Guide
Setting the Machine's IP Address (IPv6)

The machine supports IPv6 addresses in an IPv6 network environment.
The machine's IP address type is set to IPv4 by factory default. To use the machine in an IPv6 network
environment, set the IP address type to IPv6 or both types. The IPv6 address is set automatically when
the machine is restarted.
Print the System Settings Report to check the IPv6 address.
You can also check the IP address in the following methods:
You can set a fixed IPv6 address for the machine using either of the following methods:
Use the Printer Setup Utility for Setting IP Address.
Use the control panel to make the setting manually. Enter System Administration mode. From the
Tools menu, select Wired Network > TCP/IP > IP Mode. Set the IP Mode to IPv6 or Dual Stack.
From the IPv6 menu, set Set IPv6 to Enable, and then enter the IP address into IP Address.
Use Xerox CentreWare Internet Services to make the setting manually. Print the System
Settings Report to check the address set automatically, and then use the address to access Xerox
From the Properties tab, select Connectivity > Protocols > TCP/IP > IP Mode. Set the IP Mode to
IPv6 or Dual Stack. The IPv6 address can be entered manually if the Enabled checkbox in Enable
Manual Address is checked under IPv6.
For information on how to use the Printer Setup Utility for Setting IP Address, refer to When Using the
Printer Setup Utility for Setting the IP Address on page 2-7.
For information on how to set the IP address from the control panel, refer to TCP/IP on page 9-27.
For information on how to make settings from Xerox CentreWare Internet Services, refer to Setting
Items on Xerox CentreWare Internet Services on page 2-19.
When Using the Printer Setup Utility for Setting the IP Address
This section describes how to set the IP address using the Printer Setup Utility for Setting IP Address
included in the Driver CD Kit CD-ROM.
Note When using the Printer Setup Utility for Setting IP Address, make sure that the machine is not in
use or in System Administration mode.
User Guide
2-7
1.
Insert the Driver CD Kit CD-ROM into your computer.

The Launcher runs automatically.
2.
In the Admin Tools tab, select Start Printer Setup Utility for setting IP address from the
Administration Tools, and then click Start.
The Printer Setup Utility for Setting IP Address is started.
3.
Make sure that the network cable is connected to the machine, and then click Next.
4.
As a list of available IP addresses and Mac addresses appears, select the machine and click Next.
2-8

User Guide
If you already have the IP address of the machine, click Enter IP Address and directly enter the IP
address on the displayed window.
5.
Make advanced settings if needed, and then click Next.
6.
After confirming information displayed, click Apply.

The specified settings are applied.

User Guide
2-9
7.
Click Finish to exit the Printer Setup Utility for Setting IP Address.
When the settings are properly configured, the machine reboots automatically.
8.
Confirm the assigned IP address after completing the setting process by one of the following
methods.
Printing the System Settings Report
2-10

User Guide
Activating the Communication Port To Use

Use Xerox CentreWare Internet Services to activate the communication port you want to use.
You can activate the following ports:
Port
Description
SNMP
Activate this port to use the SNMP protocol (used for operations such as loading the
machine's information to the print driver).
SMB
Activate this port to use Scan to PC (Network).
LPD
Activate this port to print when using LPD.
Port9100
Activate this port to print when using Port9100.
Send E-mail
Activate this port to send an e-mail.
For information on how to make settings from Xerox CentreWare Internet Services, refer to Setting
Items on Xerox CentreWare Internet Services on page 2-19.
To activate a communication port:
1.
Start Xerox CentreWare Internet Services.

For information on how to start Xerox CentreWare Internet Services, refer to Starting Xerox
CentreWare Internet Services on page 2-18.
2.
Click the Properties tab.

User Guide
2-11
3.
From the menu on the left, select Connectivity.
Click Port Settings, and check the checkbox of the desired port.
Click Apply.
Note Restart the machine to enable the new settings.
2-12

User Guide
Setting the Send E-mail Function

SMTP Server Settings
Use the SMTP server to send an e-mail.
Use Xerox CentreWare Internet Services to set the SMTP server.
The items to be set are shown below.
Item
Description
SMTP Server IP Address/Host Name
Enter the SMTP server's IP address as an IPv4 or IPv6 address or in

FQDN format (up to 256 characters).
Port Number for sending E-mail
Set the SMTP server's port No. (a value between 1 and 65535).
Login Credentials for the Machine to

access the SMTP Server to send
automated e-mails
Select None or SMTP AUTH to indicate whether to perform SMTP

authentication when sending an e-mail.
Login Name
Enter the SMTP server login name (between 1 and 64 ASCII code
characters).
Password
Enter the authentication password for the SMTP server (between 1

and 64 ASCII code characters).
Retype Password
Verify the SMTP server authentication password you entered by reentering it here.
Note If you selected None for Login Credentials for the Machine to access the SMTP Server to send
automated e-mails, you can leave the Login Name, Password and Retype Password fields blank.
To make the settings:
1.


User Guide
2-13
2.
3.
From the menu on the left, select Connectivity > Protocols.
4.
Click SMTP Server, and enter the settings.
5.
Click Apply.
E-mail Header and Body Settings

When sending a scanned document as an e-mail attachment, you can enter an e-mail header and
body.
2-14

User Guide
Use Xerox CentreWare Internet Services to make the settings.

The items to be set are shown below.
Item
Description
Subject
Enter up to 128 ASCII code characters. (Default: Scan Data from

(machine model name))
Message
Enter up to 256 ASCII code characters.
Note To send an e-mail, you need to set the system administrator's e-mail address. You cannot send an
e-mail unless this is set.
For information on how to set the system administrator's e-mail address, refer to Administrator's Email Address on page 2-21.
To make the settings:
1.

2.
3.
From the menu on the left, select Services > E-mail.

User Guide
2-15
4.
2-16
Click Defaults, and enter the Subject, Message, and Maximum Attachment Size.

User Guide

Xerox CentreWare Internet Services
Xerox CentreWare Internet Services provides services such as changing settings using a web browser
on a computer connected to a TCP/IP network environment.
Notes
The Network Kit is required to use this function The IP address of the machine also needs to be
set. For information on how to set the IP address, refer to Setting the Network Environment on
page 2-6.
When changing any settings using Xerox CentreWare Internet Services, the machine should be
in standby status or energy saver mode.
Supported Environments and Settings

Operating Systems and Web Browsers
The operation of Xerox CentreWare Internet Services has been verified for the following web
browsers:
Operating System
Web Browsers
Windows 8
Windows Internet Explorer 10
Windows Server 2012
Windows 7
Windows Vista
Windows XP
Windows Internet Explorer 6 SP2, Mozilla Firefox 3.x, Netscape

7.1 Navigator

User Guide
2-17
Web Browser Settings

Specifying the machine's address in the web browser is recommended.
Note If you specify the machine's address using a proxy server, the service response time may be slow
or the screens may not appear. If these problems occur, you will need to set the machine's IP address
in the web browser and choose not to use a proxy server. See your web browser's manual for how to
make the setting.
You will also need to make other web browser settings to make Xerox CentreWare Internet Services
work properly.
The following procedure is based on the Internet Explorer 6.0.
1. From the Tools menu, select Internet Options.
2. In the General tab, click Settings under Temporary Internet Files.
3. In the Settings dialog box, select Check for newer versions of stored pages:.
4. Select Every visit to the page or Every time you start Internet Explorer.
5. Click OK.
6. Click OK in the Internet Options dialog box.
Starting Xerox CentreWare Internet Services

To start Xerox CentreWare Internet Services:
1. Start your computer and a web browser.
2. In your web browser's address bar, enter the machine's IP address or URL, and then press the
Enter key.
The top page of Xerox CentreWare Internet Services is displayed.
-
Example IP address (IPv4)
Example IP address (IPv6)
Example URL
Notes
If your network uses DNS (Domain Name System) and the machine's host name is registered on
the domain name server, you can access the machine using the Internet address combining the
host name and the domain name. For example, if the host name is "myhost", and the domain
name is "example.com" then the Internet address is "myhost.example.com".
2-18

User Guide
When specifying a port number, add ":" and the port number after the IP address or the Internet
address.
The IPv6 address cannot be entered manually in some cases depending on the web browser that
you use.
HTTPS is not supported.
Setting Items on Xerox CentreWare Internet Services

The table below lists the menu items on the Xerox CentreWare Internet Services screens.
Notes
You must have a user name and a passcode to change the settings. The user ID "admin" and the
passcode "1111" is set as default. For information on how to change the user ID and the passcode,
refer to Using Xerox CentreWare Internet Services on page 2-17 and System Administrator
Settings (Security) on page 2-32.
You cannot enter the system administration mode from a computer while the machine control
panel is in use, the machine side is in the system administration mode, or there are any current or
pending jobs. If you still cannot enter System Administration mode, wait for 5 minutes and try

User Guide
2-19
again since there may be background process running such as fax job. Also, you cannot operate
the machine control panel while a computer is entering system administration mode.
Tab
Menu Item
See Page:
Properties
P. 2-21
Description
P. 2-21
General Setup
Energy Saver Settings

Connectivity
Port Settings
P. 2-22
Physical Connections
Ethernet
Protocols
P. 2-22
-
TCP/IP
P. 2-22
SNMP Configuration
P. 2-24
Microsoft Networking
P. 2-26
LPD
P. 2-27
Port9100
P. 2-27
SMTP Server
P. 2-28
HTTP
P. 2-29
Services
Email
Defaults
Scan
P. 2-29
-
Job Templates
Security
P. 2-30
-
IP Filtering
P. 2-31
System Administrator Settings
P. 2-32
Support
P. 2-33
Support
Address Book
2-20
P. 2-21
P. 2-33
P. 2-33
View All Names
P. 2-33
Common Tasks
P. 2-35

User Guide
Tab
Menu Item
See Page:
Add New Name

Management
P. 2-35
P. 2-35
Import Data
P. 2-35
Export Data
P. 2-36
Delete All Names
P. 2-36
Note Double-byte characters cannot be used in Xerox CentreWare Internet Services.
Properties Tab
Description
Item
Description
Machine Model
The product name is displayed.
Serial Number
The product serial number is displayed.
Machine Name
You can enter the printer name (up to 32 ASCII code characters excluding
colons (:), equal signs (=), at symbols (@), or asterisks (*), which are not
valid). (Default: "WorkCentre 5022" or "WorkCentre 5024")
Location
You can enter the machine's location (up to 255 ASCII code characters).
Contact Person
You can enter the contact person's information (up to 255 ASCII code
characters).
Administrator's E-mail Address
You can enter the e-mail address of the system administrator (up to 128
characters).
This information is required for sending an e-mail.
Energy Saver Settings (General Setup)

Note Neither of Low Power mode or Sleep mode can be disabled.
Item
Description
Time to Low Power Mode
You can set the time elapse from the last operation until the machine
enters Low Power mode. You can set a value between 1 and 60 minutes.
(Default: 1)
Time to Sleep Mode
You can set the time elapse from Low Power mode until the machine enters
Sleep mode. You can set a value between 1 and 239 minutes. (Default: 1)
Apply button
You can apply changes by pressing this button.

User Guide
2-21
Port Settings (Connectivity)

Item
Description
Port
You can activate or deactivate communication ports. You can select from
SNMP, SMB, LPD, Port9100, and Send E-mail. Activate each port by
checking its checkbox.
Apply button
Note Reboot the machine to enable new settings.
Ethernet (Connectivity > Physical Connections)

Item
Description
Rated Speed
You can set the Ethernet port speed. You can select from Auto, 10 Mbps
Half-Duplex, 10 Mbps Full-Duplex, 100 Mbps Half-Duplex, or 100 Mbps FullDuplex. (Default: Auto)
MAC Address
The machine's MAC address is displayed.
Apply button
TCP/IP (Connectivity > Protocols)

IP Mode
You can set the IP operation mode. You can select from Dual Stack, IPv4, or IPv6. The Dual Stack
setting lets you use both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses. (Default: IPv4)
General
Protocol
Enabled is displayed.
Physical Connection
Ethernet is displayed.
Host Name
You can set the host name. You can enter between 1 and 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters or
hyphens. (Default: last 16-digit of the MAC address).
Note Hyphens (-) cannot be used as the first or last character in the string.
IPv4
IP Address Resolution:
You can set the method used to acquire the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway Address.
You can select from STATIC, DHCP, BOOTP, RARP, or DHCP/Autonet for the address
acquisition method. (Default: DHCP/Autonet)
2-22

User Guide
IP Address:
You can enter the IP address when STATIC is selected for IP Address Resolution.
Subnet Mask:
You can enter the subnet mask when STATIC is selected for IP Address Resolution.
Gateway Address:
You can enter the gateway address when STATIC is selected for IP Address Resolution.
IPv6
Enable Manual Address:
You can check this checkbox to enter the IP address and gateway address directly. (Default:
Off)
-
IP Address:
You can enter the IP address when the Enable Manual Address checkbox is checked.
Automatically Configured Address 1:

The automatically assigned IPv6 address is displayed.
Link-Local Address:
The automatically assigned link-local address is displayed.
Gateway Address:
You can enter the gateway address when the Enable Manual Address checkbox is checked.
Automatically Configured Gateway Address:

The automatically assigned gateway address displayed.
Domain Name
Used to enter the DNS domain name (up to 255 characters).
DNS Configuration
IPv4
Obtain DNS Server Address Automatically:
Check this checkbox to acquire the DNS server address automatically using DHCP. When you
set the DNS server address acquisition method to DHCP, you must also set the IP address
acquisition method to DHCP.
-
Preferred DNS Server:

Used to enter the DNS server address manually.
Alternate DNS Server 1-2:

Used to enter alternate DNS server addresses manually.
IPv6
Obtain IPv6 DNS Server Address Automatically:
Check this checkbox to set the DNS server address automatically using DHCP.

User Guide
2-23
Preferred DNS Server:

Used to enter the DNS server address manually.
Alternate DNS Server 1-2:

Used to enter alternate DNS server addresses manually.
Dynamic DNS Registration (IPv4)

Sets dynamic updating of the IPv4 DNS server. Checking Enabled enables dynamic updating of
the DNS server. Checking Overwrite enables dynamic updating of the data in the DNS server
database.
Dynamic DNS Registration (IPv6)

Sets dynamic updating of the IPv6 DNS server. Checking Enabled enables dynamic updating of
the DNS server. Checking Overwrite enables dynamic updating of the data in the DNS server
database.
Generate Domain Search List Automatically

Check Enabled to create domain search lists automatically.
Domain Name 1-3

Used to enter the name of the domain to search (up to 255 characters).
Connection Time-Out
Sets the timeout period when searching for domains (between 1 and 60 seconds). (Default: 1)
DNS Resolution via IPv6 First

Check Enabled to prioritize IPv6 for resolving DNS names when IP mode is set to Dual Stack.
(Default: On)
Apply button
Press this button to confirm the entered settings.
SNMP Configuration (Connectivity > Protocols)

You can set the SNMP protocol.
General
SNMP Port Status
You can check Enabled to use SNMP. (Default: On)
Edit SNMP v1/v2c Properties button

You can make advanced SNMP v1/v2c settings by pressing this button. (Default: On)
-
Community Name (Read Only):

You can enter the community name to acquire (up to 32 ASCII code characters). (Default:
blank (public))
2-24

User Guide
Community Name (Read/Write):

You can enter the community name to acquire/write (up to 32 ASCII code characters).
(Default: blank (private))
Trap Community Name:

You can enter the community name for trap notification (up to 32 ASCII code characters).
(Default: blank (SNMP_trap))
System Administrator's Login ID:

You can enter information related to the person in charge of maintenance of the machine (up
to 127 ASCII code characters)(Default: blank).
Authentication Failure Generic Traps

You can check Enabled to send an authentication failure trap notification when an access attempt was
made with an invalid community name not registered in the machine. (Default: On)
Advanced button
You can make the following settings by pressing this button:
Add UDP IPv4 Address button
You can add a recipient address for UDP IPv4 trap notification by pressing this button.
-
IP Address:
You can enter the IP address for entry.
UDP Port Number:

You can set the UDP port No. for entry (a value between 1 and 65535).
SNMP Version:
You can specify the SNMP version for entry as v1 or v2c. (Default: SNMP v1)

You can enter the trap community name for entry (between 1 and 32 ASCII code characters).
(Default: SNMP_trap)
Trap to be Received:
You can set whether to send notification of Print, Cold Start, and Authentication Failure
events.
Add UDP IPv6 Address button

You can add a recipient address for UDP IPv6 trap notification by pressing this button.
-
IP Address:
You can enter the IP address for entry.
UDP Port Number:

You can set the UDP port No. for entry (a value between 1 and 65535).

User Guide
2-25
SNMP Version:
You can specify the SNMP version for entry as v1 or v2c. (Default: SNMP v1)

You can enter the trap community name for entry (between 1 and 32 ASCII code characters).
(Default: SNMP_trap)
Trap to be Received:
You can set whether to send notification of Print, Cold Start and Authentication Failure
events.
Delete button
You can delete the traps specified for the trap notification recipient IP address by pressing this
button.
Edit button
You can display notification information of the trap you are using. You can specify the events for
which to send notification.
Apply button
Microsoft Networking (Connectivity > Protocols)

You can set the SMB protocol and WINS server.
Filing Destination
SMB Port Status
You can check Enabled to use SMB. (Default: On)
Physical Connection
Transport
TCP/IP is displayed.
Server Information (WINS Server)

Note Displays when IP Mode is set to IPv4 or Dual Stack.
Protocol
Displays Enabled.
Obtain WINS Server Address Automatically

You can check this checkbox to acquire the WINS server address automatically using DHCP. When
you set the WINS server address acquisition method to DHCP, you must also set the IP address
acquisition method to DHCP. (Default: ON)
2-26

User Guide
Primary Server IP Address & Port

You can set the primary WINS server address.
Secondary Server IP Address & Port

You can set the secondary WINS server address.
Apply button
LPD (Connectivity > Protocols)

You can set the LPD port.
General
LPD Port Status
You can check Enabled to use LPD. (Default: On)
Physical Connection
Port Number
You can set the LPD port No. (a value between 1 and 65535). You must set a unique number for
each port. (Default: 515)
Connection Time-Out
You can set the timeout period that the machine waits before terminating the connection when
incoming data stops (between 2 and 3600 seconds). (Default: 60)
Maximum Connections per Port

The maximum number of connections is displayed.
Apply button
Port9100 (Connectivity > Protocols)

You can set Port9100.
General
Port9100 Port Status
You can check Enabled to use Port9100. (Default: On)

User Guide
2-27
Physical Connection
Port Information
TCP Port Number
You can set the Port9100 port No. (a value between 1 and 65535).
You must set a unique number for each port. (Default: 9100)
Maximum Connections per Port

The maximum number of connections is displayed.
End of Job Timeout

You can set the amount of time the machine waits before terminating the connection when
incoming data stops (between 2 and 3600 seconds). (Default: 60)
PDL Switching
Apply button
SMTP Server (Connectivity > Protocols)

You can set the SMTP server.
Required Information
SMTP Server IP Address/Host Name
You can enter the SMTP server's address as an IPv4 or IPv6 address or in FQDN format (up to 256
characters).
Port Number for Sending E-mail

You can set the port number used by the SMTP server to send an e-mail (a value between 1 and
65535). (Default: 25)
Login Credentials for the Machine to access the SMTP Server to send automated e-mails
You can set the authentication method when sending an e-mail by SMTP. You can select None or
SMTP AUTH. (Default: None)
Login Name
For SMTP servers requiring authentication, enter the e-mail address of the authenticated SMTP
user (between 1 to 64 ASCII code characters). This can be left blank if SMTP authentication is
skipped.
2-28

User Guide
Password
You can enter the password for authentication (between 1 and 64 ASCII code characters). This
can be left blank if SMTP authentication is skipped.
Retype Password
You can verify the authentication password you entered by re-entering it here.
Apply button
HTTP (Connectivity > Protocols)

You can set the HTTP protocol.
Configuration
Connection
Physical Connection
Keep Alive Timeout

The keep-alive timeout period is displayed.
Port Number
You can set the port No. used for HTTP communication (a value between 1 and 65535). You must
set a unique number for each port. (Default: 80)
Connection Time-Out
Set the connection timeout period from 1 through 255 seconds. (Default: 30)
Title
You can select the display for the title displayed on a browser from None Internet Services or
Printer model - IP Address.
Apply button
Defaults (Services > E-mail)

General
Subject (Default: Scan Data from "model name")
You can enter the E-mail header (up to 128 ASCII code characters).

User Guide
2-29
Message
You can enter the E-mail body (up to 256 ASCII code characters).
Maximum Attached Size (Default: 20MB)

You can set the maximum file size between 2 and 20 MB to attach to an e-mail.
Apply button
Job Templates (Services > Scan)

Network Scanning
Output Color
You can set the color mode from Black & White or Color. (Default: Black & White)
Original Type
You can set the type of document to optimize the scan data from Text, Photo & Text, or Photo.
(Default: Text)
Advanced Settings
Lighten/Darken
You can set the density from five levels. (Default: Normal)
Sharpness
You can set the sharpness from five levels. (Default: Normal)
Background Suppression
You can check Enabled to enable background suppression. (Default: On)
Background Suppression Level

You can set the background suppression from five levels. (Default: Normal)
Resolution
You can set the scan resolution from 200x200dpi, 300x300dpi, 400x400dpi, or 600x600dpi.
(Default: 200x200dpi)
Note When Color Mode is set to Color and 400x400dpi or 600x600dpi is selected for the
resolution, the Color Mode is automatically set to Black & White.
Image Compression
You can set the file compression from five levels. (Default: Standard)
2-30

User Guide
Layout Adjustment
Edge Erase
You can set the edge erase value between 0 and 10 mm for erasing the black shadows created
around the edges of the paper when scanning with the document cover open. (Default: 2 mm)
Filing Options
File Format
In Color mode, you can set the file format for the scanned data from JPEG or PDF. (Default: PDF)
In Black & White mode, you can set the file format for the scanned data from TIFF or PDF.
(Default: PDF)
IP Filtering (Security)
You can restrict the supported IP addresses.
IPv4 Filtering
IP Filtering
You can check Enabled to enable IP Filtering. (Default: Off)
IP Filter Rule List

The accessible IPv4 address is displayed.
Add button
The Add IP Filter Rule - IPv4 screen is displayed. You can add the accessible IPv4 address. You can
add up to 10 IPv4 addresses.
-
Source IP Address:
You can set the IP address that is allowed from access. (Default: 0.0.0.0)
Source IP Mask:
You can set the prefix length of the IP address that is allowed from access. (Default: 0)
Edit button
The Edit IP Filter Rule - IPv4 screen is displayed. You can edit the accessible IPv4 address.
-
Source IP Address:
You can set the accessible IP address.
Source IP Mask:
You can set the prefix length of the accessible IP address. (Default: 0)
Delete button
You can delete the accessible IPv4 address.
IPv6 Filtering
IP Filtering
You can check Enabled to enable IP Filtering. (Default: Off)
User Guide
2-31
IP Filter Rule List

The accessible IPv6 address is displayed.
Add button
The Add IP Filter Rule - IPv6 screen is displayed. Adds an accessible IPv6 address. You can add up
to 10 IPv6 addresses.
-
Source IP Address:
You can set the accessible IP address.
Source IP Mask:
You can set the prefix length of the accessible IP address (Default: 0)
Edit button
The Edit IP Filter Rule - IPv6 screen is displayed. Edits the accessible IPv6 address.
-
Source IP Address:
You can set the accessible IP address. (Default: 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0)
Source IP Mask:
You can set the prefix length of the accessible IP address. (Default: 0)
Delete button
You can delete the accessible IPv6 address by pressing this button.
Apply button
System Administrator Settings (Security)

You can set the system administrator's user ID and the passcode.
System Administrator Settings
Administrator's Login ID
You can enter the system administrator's user ID (between 1 and 32 ASCII code characters in
length, excludes "+", ";", "<", ">", """, "?", "[", "]", "'", "{", "}", "|", ":". (Default: admin)
Administrator's Passcode
You can set the system administrator's passcode (between 4 and 12 ASCII code characters or
blank). (Default: 1111)
Retype Administrator's Passcode

You need to re-enter the system administrators passcode.
2-32

User Guide
Maximum Login Attempts

When login attempts using the system administrators user ID fail repeatedly, access is denied
when the number of failed attempts reaches the number set here.
Specify a number between 0 and 10. Specify 0 to disable this setting.
The total number of failed authentication attempts is reset when authentication is successful or
the system is restarted. (Default: 5)
Apply button
Support Tab
The links to support information is displayed. The link settings can be changed.
Support
Change Settings button
You can change the links to support information by pressing this button.
Name
You can enter the link name (between 1 and 63 ASCII code characters).
URL
You can enter the link address (between 1 and 63 alphanumeric characters including the at
symbol (@), percent sign (%), period (.), colon (:), forward slash (/), underline(_), hyphen (-), tilde
(~), question mark (?), and ampersand (&), which are valid).
Apply button
Address Book Tab

The list of location information where the scanned data is stored is displayed.
You can register the total of 30 E-mail and Server addresses.
View All Names

Address Number
The registered numbers (4 digits) of the E-mail or Server addresses are displayed.
Name
The registered names of the E-mail or Server addresses are displayed.
User Guide
2-33
Address Type
The address types of the registered addresses are displayed.
Actions
Edit/Delete address information.
Edit
Edit the selected address information.
Delete
Delete the selected address information.
Common Settings
Address Number
The registered number of the address is displayed. (Not editable)
Name
Enter the name of the address to be registered in ASCII code or UTF-8 with up to 16 characters.
Note The entered characters should match the language setting specified in the machine.
Otherwise, the text will be garbled. Some characters may not be displayed correctly.
Address Type
Select the address type (E-mail or Server) of the registered address.
E-mail Address (E-Mail only)

Enter the e-mail address to be registered in ASCII code alphabetic or symbols with up to 64
characters.
Server Name/IP Address (Server only)

Enter the DNS name (FQDN) of a server, an IP address, or a NetBIOS name (only for SMB) to be
registered in ASCII code alphabetic or symbols (.-: (three symbols)) with up to 64 characters.
Shared Name (Server only)

Enter the SMB shared name to be registered with up to 32 characters in ASCII code alphabetic,
numbers, blank, and UTF-8.
Detailed Settings (Server only)

Server Path
Enter the storage directory path to be registered with up to 96 characters in ASCII code
alphabetic, numbers, blank, and UTF-8.
2-34

User Guide
User Name
Enter the user name to be registered with up to 96 characters in ASCII code alphabetic, numbers,
and blank.
Password
Enter the password for SMB to be registered with up to 32 characters in ASCII code numbers,
symbols, and blank.
Retype Password
Re-enter the password for confirmation.
Port Number
Select whether to specify the port number used for the transfer protocol to be registered. To
specify the port number, select the Enter Number and enter a value from 139, 445, 5000 to
65535.
Apply button
Click this button to confirm the entered settings.
Undo button
Click this button to cancel the entered settings.
Common Tasks
Add New Name
Address Number
Select whether to specify a speed dial number to be registered. To specify the speed dial number,
select the Specify Preferred Address Number and enter the speed dial number that you want to
register. If the Specify Preferred Address Number is not selected, a speed dial number is
automatically assigned.
Name
Enter a name of the address to be registered in ASCII code or UTF-8 with up to 16 characters.
Address Type
Select the address type (E-mail or Server) of the registered address.
Management
Import Data
Imports an Address Book file (*.dat) of other machines.
Note If the imported data is modified, it will not be exported properly.
Address Book File

Specify an Address Book file (*.dat) to import. Click the Browse... button to select the file (*.dat) to
import in the dialog box displayed.

User Guide
2-35
Export Data
Downloads an Address Book file (*.dat).
Delete All Names...
Deletes all address data.
Note Press this button to apply the entered settings.
2-36

User Guide
Installing the Print Driver/Scan Driver

Installing the Print Driver
To enable the machine to print, you must first install a print driver from the Driver CD Kit CD-ROM.
The CD-ROM contains the following print driver.
Print Driver Name
Description
Xerox WorkCentre
5022/5024
Click Print Driver in the Main menu of the Driver CD Kit to start
the installation.
The standard print driver converts the data created by the
application software to images before sending them to the
printer.
XXXXX: Displayed as either "5022" or "5024," depending on the model of your machine.
To install the print driver, follow the instructions provided in the CD-ROM Documentation (HTML)
included on the CD-ROM.
Installing the Scan Driver

A direct USB connection to a computer lets you load scanned data from the machine directly to the
computer.

User Guide
2-37
The Driver CD Kit CD-ROM comes with the TWAIN-compatible and Windows Imaging Acquisition
(WIA)-compatible scan driver.
Application
Description
TWAIN-compatible and WIAcompatible scan driver
Click Scan Driver in the Main menu on the Driver CD Kit to

start the installation.
This feature can be used to load scan data from a TWAINcompatible or WIA-compatible application installed on a
computer.
Note: Only 32-bit TWAIN-compatible applications are
supported.
For more information, refer to Using an Application to Load
Scan Data from the Machine via USB on page 7-6.
Address Book Editor
Select Install Fax Utility in the User Tools menu of the

Driver CD Kit, and click the Start button to start the
installation.
Use to register recipient for sending document by fax. You
can select a recipient using the Address Book button on the
control panel if you register the information to Address Book
Editor and save it to the machine.
You can also retrieve the fax recipients phone numbers
registered on a printer or using Xerox CentreWare
Internet Services.
For more information on settings items, see the Address Book
Editor's Help information.
To install the scan driver, follow the instructions provided in the CD-ROM Documentation (HTML)
included on the CD-ROM.
Be sure to restart the computer immediately after installing the scan driver.
Note This function is not available on a network environment.
Uninstalling
Uninstalling the print driver
To uninstall the print driver, use the uninstallation tool on the Driver CD Kit CD-ROM. Follow the
instructions provided in the CD-ROM Documentation (HTML) included on the CD-ROM.
Uninstalling other software
To uninstall other software installed from the Driver CD Kit CD-ROM, see the application's Readme file.
Readme files can be displayed from the Product Information (HTML) on the CD-ROM.
2-38

User Guide
Product Overview
This chapter lists the name of each machine component, and describes basic operations such as how
to turn the power on/off and use the control panel.
Machine Components
This section describes the machine components and their features.

User Guide
3-1
Product Overview
Front, Left Side
1
2
3
4
13
5
6
12
11
10
9
No.
Component
Description
Document cover
Holds the document in place.
Document glass
Place the document here.
Control panel
Contains the buttons, LED indicators, and display used for operations.
For more information, refer to Control Panel on page 3-11.
Center tray
Copies and prints are delivered here, facing down.
Front cover
Open this cover to replace consumables.
Tray 1 (standard tray)
Load paper here.
Tray 2
(One Tray Module)
(Optional)
Optional tray. Load paper here.
Trays 3, 4
(Two Tray Module)
(Optional)
Optional tray. Load paper here.
Locking casters
Locks the wheels of the machine. Lock these casters after moving the
machine to its installation site.
10
Two tray module cover C
Open this cover to remove any jammed paper from Tray 3 or 4.
3-2

User Guide
Product Overview
No.
Component
Description
11
One tray module cover B
Open this cover to remove any jammed paper from Tray 2.
12
Tray 5 (bypass)
Load paper here. The tray can be extended.
13
Left cover A
Open this cover to remove any jammed paper.

Note: When the machine works properly, this cover is locked. To open
this cover, make sure to exit Sleep mode and turn the machine's power
off.

User Guide
3-3
Product Overview
Right Side, Rear
7
6
1
2
3
4
No.
Component
Description
LINE 1
Connects to a telephone line.
TEL
Connects the machine to a telephone device.
Power switch
Switches the power of the machine on and off.

For more information, refer to Power Source on page 3-7.
Power cord connector
Connects the power cord.
Adjusting foot
Prevents the machine from toppling over. Move the machine to its
installation site and then rotate this adjuster in clockwise direction
until it touches a floor.
USB 1.1/2.0 interface

connector (Type B)
Connect a USB 1.1/2.0 cable.
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
interface connector
Connect a network cable.
Notes
LINE 1 and the TEL connectors are available when the Fax Kit is installed.
The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX interface connectors are available when the Network Kit is installed.
3-4

User Guide
Product Overview
Inside
No.
Component
Description
Toner cartridge
Contains toner (the powder used to form the image).
Drum cartridge
Contains photoconductors.
Fusing unit
Fuses toner on paper.

CAUTION: Do not touch this unit as it is extremely hot.

User Guide
3-5
Product Overview
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (Optional)

1
No.
Component
Description
Document feeder cover
Inner cover
Document guides
Aligns the edges of documents.
Document feeder tray
Load documents here.
Document stopper
Prevents outputs from falling off.
Document output tray
Outputs are delivered here.
Narrow glass strip
Scans the loaded documents.
Note In this guide, the duplex automatic document feeder is referred to as the "document feeder."
3-6

User Guide
Product Overview
Power Source
Switching the Power On
The following describes how to switch the power on.
The machine takes approximately 19 seconds to warm up and to be ready to copy, print, or fax after
the power is turned on. It may take slightly longer than normal depending on the device configuration.
Switch the power off at the end of the day or when not using the machine for an extended period of
time.
1. Press the power switch to the On position to switch the power on.
Notes
The "Please wait" message indicates that the machine is warming up. The machine is not
accessible while it is warming up.
Make sure that the power cable is connected to the machine and the wall outlet properly..
Switching the Power Off

The following describes how to switch the power off.
Notes
Do not switch the power off in the following situations. If the power is switched off, the processing
data may be erased.
While data is being received
While a job is being printed
While a job is being copied
While a job is being scanned
When switching the power off, wait 5 seconds after outputs have been delivered.
When powering the machine on after it has been switched off, wait 10 seconds after the display
goes off.

User Guide
3-7
Product Overview
1.
2.
3-8
Before switching the power off, make sure that the machine has completed all copy or print jobs.
Then, make sure that the Data indicator does not light up.
Press the power switch to the Off position to switch the power off.

User Guide
Product Overview
Energy Saver Modes

The machine is installed with an energy saver feature that will automatically cut off the electricity to
the machine if no copy or print data is received for a certain duration.
There are two energy saver modes: Low Power mode and Sleep mode.
Low Power mode
The machine's power is not turned off completely in Low Power mode. Instead, this mode creates a
balance between low power consumption and short warm-up time by controlling the temperature of
the fusing unit to a level midway between the power off temperature and the "Ready" temperature.
Sleep mode
Sleep mode minimizes power consumption by shutting off the power to all components except the
controller. Warm-up time in Sleep mode is longer than in Low Power mode.
Entering the Energy Saver Modes

The display of the machine status diagram goes off, and the Energy Saver button on the control panel
lights up when the machine is in an energy saver mode.
Energy Saver button
You can set the length of time to wait until the machine enters Low Power/Sleep mode.
Low Power mode is set to 1 min. and Sleep mode to 1 min. at the time of factory shipment. If the
machine is left idle for 1 minute, it switches to Low Power mode and then to Sleep mode if left idle for
another minute after that.

User Guide
3-9
Product Overview
You can set the amount of time the machine waits before entering Low Power mode from 1 to 60
minutes, and the amount of time the machine waits before entering Sleep mode from 1 to 239
minutes.
Note The life of the fusing unit is largely influenced by power distribution time on the machine. Setting
the amount of time the machine waits before activating the energy saver feature to a long value will
keep the machine's power on longer, and the fusing unit may have to be replaced more often. It may
cause an early replacement of the fusing unit of the machine. For more information, contact our
Customer Support Center.
For more information on how to set the time interval for Low Power mode and/or Sleep mode,
refer to Energy Saver Settings (General Setup) on page 2-21.
Exiting Energy Saver Modes

The following describes how to deactivate an Energy Saver mode.
The machine exits Energy Saver mode and the Energy Saver button light goes off in the following
instances:
Exiting Low Power Mode
Receiving a job
Pressing the Energy Saver button
Entering System Administration mode from a computer
Pressing any button on the control panel
Taking paper out or putting in a tray
Opening or closing the document cover
Opening or closing any cover of the machine
Placing a document in the document feeder
Exiting Sleep Mode
Receiving a job
Pressing the Energy Saver button
Entering System Administration mode from a computer
3-10

User Guide
Product Overview
Control Panel
The names and functions of the control panel's components are described below.
1
9 10
11
12
13
14
28
27
26 2524
23
22
21
20
19
18 17 16 15
29
No.
Component
Description
Copy button
Press this button to use the Copy feature. When the Copy feature is
selected, this button lights up.
For more information, refer to Copy on page 5-1.
ID Card Copy button
Press this button to use the ID Card Copy feature. When the ID Card
Copy feature is selected, this button lights up.
For more information, refer to ID Card Copy on page 5-10.
Display
Displays the operation menu items and the machine status messages.
Job Status button
Press this button to check/cancel a current job or pending job.
buttons
OK button
Press to select a menu item on the menu screen and to change

settings.
The
button allows you to select the previous menu item.
The
button allows you to select the next menu item.
The
button allows you to go to the next menu screen.
The
button allows you to return to the previous menu screen.
Press this button and the arrow buttons to change settings.

For more information, refer to Using Quick-Buttons on page 3-14.

User Guide
3-11
Product Overview
No.
Component
Description
Log In/Out button
Press this button to enter or exit System Administration mode (for at

least for 4 seconds) or Account mode. This button lights up when the
machine is in System Administration mode.
Numeric keypad
Press this button to enter numbers (such as number of copies) or text.
Dial Pause button
Press this button to insert a pause between numbers when entering a

recipient's number.
10
Machine Status button
Press this button to print reports and check the machine information
such as the status of consumables and the machines IP address.
11
Energy Saver button
Lights up when the machine enters Energy Saver mode to conserve

power when the machine is left idle for a while. You can also press this
button to enter or exit Energy Saver mode.
12
Stop button
Press this button to cancel a current job or failed job.
13
ClearAll button
Press this button to reset the displayed settings of each feature to

default values or clear the entered numbers. The setting is returned to
the same condition as the machine is powered on.
14
Start button
Press this button to start scanning documents or confirm the value of

each setting.
15
Error indicator
Blinks if a system error occurs.

This indicator lights up when a problem other than a system error
occurs with the machine, including paper jams and running out of
paper.
16
Data indicator
Blinks when the machine is sending or receiving data to or from a

client. This indicator lights up when data is stored in the machine's
memory or when the machine receives faxes waiting to be printed.
17
Speed Dial button
Press this button to specify a recipient with entering a Speed Dial

number when sending a fax.
18
C (Clear) button
Press this button to delete one numerical value that you have entered.
19
Address Book button
Press this button to display the recipients registered for the Address
Book when sending data by fax, e-mail, or network.
20
Back button
Press this button to return the display to the previous screen.
21
Collated/Resolution button
(Quick-Button)
Press this button to display the setting screen for the Collated or
Resolution function that lets you change the output method for Copy
feature and the resolution for Scan feature.
This button lights up when this function is available.
22
2 Sided button
(Quick-Button)
Press this button to display the setting screen for the 2 Sided function
that lets you select 2 sided printing for Copy and Scan features.
3-12

User Guide
Product Overview
No.
Component
Description
23
Original Type button

(Quick-Button)
Press this button to display the setting screen for the Original Type
function that lets you change the type of document for Copy, ID Card
Copy, and Scan features.
24
Lighten/Darken button
(Quick-Button)
Press this button to display the setting screen for the Lighten/Darken
function that lets you adjust the brightness for Copy, ID Card Copy,
and Scan features. Also, the Toner Saver setting is available for Copy
feature.
25
Scan button
Press this button to use the Scan feature. When the Scan feature is
For more information, refer to Scan on page 7-1.
26
Fax button
Press this button to use the Fax feature. When the Fax feature is
For more information, refer to Fax on page 6-1.
27
Outline view
Used to verify the location indicated in an error message appears on

the display.
28
Paper clip tray
Used as a place to store paper clips, staples, etc.
29
One touch panels (Only

available for machines with
the Fax Kit)
Used to specify the recipient when sending a fax. The recipients

registered for one touch buttons 1 to 36 correspond to Speed Dial
numbers 001 to 036.
Note Some buttons are not available on some models. If you add certain options, you will be able to
use them. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

User Guide
3-13
Product Overview
Using Quick-Buttons
Quick-Buttons give direct access to the settings screen where you can check the current settings and
make changes.
Quick-Buttons
1.
Hold down a Quick-Button or press it repeatedly to scroll through the options.

The screen shows the icons for the selected mode and available selections. (See example below.)
Copy
Paper Supply...
Reduce/Enlarge...
Pages per Side...
2.
111
Auto
Auto
Off
icons
available selections
When the value you want is highlighted, release the Quick-Button.

After two seconds, the setting screen exits and the last item selected is applied.
A new setting is applied when:

2 seconds has passed after pressing the Quick-Button and the setting screen exits.
Another Quick-Button is pressed.
The Start button is pressed. In this case, a job, such as copying in Copy mode, proceeds.
In Scan mode, when the Address Book button is pressed. You can also change the address by
pressing the button continuously.
Note The setting screen exits 2 seconds after a Quick-Button is released and the selected setting is
applied.
3-14

User Guide
Product Overview
Example: Copy > Original Type
Current setting:
Text
New selection:
Photo&Text
2 sec *
Photo&Text is applied
automatically
New selection:
Photo

User Guide
* The setting screen exits 2

seconds after a Quick-Button is
released, and the selected setting
is applied.
3-15
Product Overview
About Icons on the Display

This section describes icons displayed on the screens and the functions available for each feature.
Copy
Paper Supply...
Reduce/Enlarge...
Pages per Side...
Function
Lighten/Darken
Original Type
3-16
111
Auto
Auto
Off
Icon
Item
Copy
ID Card
Copy
Scan
Fax
Darken +2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Darken +1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Normal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lighten +1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lighten +2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Toner Saver
Yes
Photo
Yes
Yes
Yes
Photo & Text
Yes
Yes
Yes
Text
Yes
Yes
Yes

User Guide
Product Overview
Function
Item
Copy
ID Card
Copy
Scan
Fax
1 1 Sided
Yes
1 2 Sided
Yes
2 1 Sided
Yes
2 2 Sided
Yes
Off
Yes
Flip on Long Edge
Yes
Flip on Short Edge
Yes
111
Off
Yes
123
On
Yes
123
On (Rotate)
Yes
200
200 200
Yes
300
300 300
Yes
400
400 400
Yes
600
600 600
Yes
Icon
2 Sided
Collated
Resolution

User Guide
3-17
Product Overview
About the Default Display Screen

The Default Display screen lets you change the Default Display Screen the screen displayed when
turning the power on and after returning from Energy Saver mode.
Setting the Default Display

You can set the default displayed screen from Copy, Fax, or Scan screen.
Note Some screens cannot be set on some models.
1.
Press and hold the Log In/Out button for at least 4 seconds.
Log In/Out button
The passcode input screen appears.

Note The passcode is initially set to "1111"(four "1" digits).
System Admin. Passcode

[
2.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the passcode, and then press the OK button.
Note The Log In/Out button lights when the machine is in System Administration mode.

[* * * * * ]
3-18

User Guide
Product Overview
3.
In the Tools screen, select Default Display, and then press the OK button.
Note Select
or
button to move the display up and down.
Tools
Custom Paper Size Setting...
Control Panel Language...
Default Display...
4.
Select the desired default display, and then press the OK button.
Default Display
Copy
Fax
Scan

User Guide
3-19
Product Overview
Account Modes
This section describes three different account modes that the machine offers to manage accounts
effectively for copy jobs, and how to log in to the machine.
Types of Account Modes

You can select one of the following account modes in the system settings: No Account mode, Single
Account mode, or Multiple Account mode.
For information on how to select an account mode in the system settings, refer to User Control on
page 9-48.
No Account mode
No password is set on the machine in the No Account mode, allowing all users to
execute any jobs.
Single Account mode
A single password is set on the machine in Single Account mode. Only those who
have the password can execute copy jobs on the machine.
Multiple Account mode
Up to 30 user accounts are set on the machine in Multiple Account Mode. You can
set a desired passcode for each user account. Users are required to enter their
account number and passcode to log in to the machine. The system administrator
can set the copy job limit on each user account, and also review the total number
of copies made by each account.
Logging in to the Machine in Single Account Mode

The following procedure describes how to log in to the machine when the machine is in Single Account
Mode.
For more information, refer to User Control on page 9-48.
1. The passcode input screen appears.
Enter Login Passcode

[
3-20

User Guide
Product Overview
2.

[* * * * * ]
Note The password is the same as the system administrators password used for entering System
Administration mode from the control panel. For information, refer to Entering System
Administration Mode on page 9-1.
3.
Press the Start button to confirm the entered passcode.

If the entered passcode is correct, the machine enters Copy mode.
Start button
The Log In/Out button is lit while you are logged in to the machine.
Log In/Out button
Note You do not need to log in to the machine for a scan job or print job.
To log out, press the Log In/Out button again.
Notes
You do not need to log in to the machine for a scan job or print job.

User Guide
3-21
Product Overview
Logging in to the Machine in Multiple Account Mode

The following procedure describes how to log in to the machine when the machine is in Multiple
Account Mode.
For more information, refer to User Control on page 9-48.
1. Select a user.
Select User
User 01...
User 02...
User 03...

[
2.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the passcode which corresponds to the account number of the
selected user, and then press the OK button.

[* * * * * ]
Note The passcode is the same as the system administrators passcode used for entering System
Administration mode from the control panel. For more information, refer to Entering System
Administration Mode on page 9-1.
3.
Press the Start button to confirm the entered passcode.

Start button
If the entered passcode is correct, the machine enters Copy Mode.
3-22

User Guide
Product Overview
The Log In/Out button remains lit while you are logged in to the machine.
Log In/Out button
Notes
You do not need to log in to the machine for a scan job or print job.

User Guide
3-23
Product Overview
Entering Text
Some operations display screens for entering text. This section describes how to enter text.
You can enter numbers, letters and symbols.
Use the numeric keypad to enter text. The type of characters you can select varies according to the
menu.
Example Menu Item
Button
Characters You Can Enter
Name, E-mail Address

(and others) (The set of
characters you can
enter changes with
each press of the
button.)
@ : . (Period) / 1 @ (Toggles back to start.)
a b c A B C 2 a (Toggles back to start.)
d e f D E F 3 d (Toggles back to start.)
g h i G H I 4 g (Toggles back to start.)
j k l J K L 5 j (Toggles back to start.)
m n o M N O 6 m (Toggles back to start.)
p r s Q R S 7 p (Toggles back to start.)
t u v T U V 8 t (Toggles back to start.)
w x y z W X Y Z 9 w (Toggles back to start.)
- (Hyphen) _ ~ - (Toggles back to start.)
@ . (Period) (Space) \ _ ! " # $ % & ' ~

^|`:;?,+-/=()[]{}
< > @ (Toggles back to start.)
3-24

User Guide
Product Overview
Example Menu Item
Button
Characters You Can Enter
Phone Number, Fax

Number (and others)
Dial
Pause
- (Pause)
: 1 back to :
A B C 2 back to A
D E F 3 back to D
IP Address, etc. (Only

numerals can be
entered for Buttons 4 to
9 and 0.)

User Guide
3-25
Product Overview
Setting the Options Configuration

When the Network Kit is installed, you can retrieve information of machine configuration into the print
driver.
Update the information of machine configuration when any optional component is changed.
When Using the Ethernet Interface

You can load the machine's option configuration automatically to the print driver.
Notes
This function is not available for some models. The Network Kit is required. For more information,
contact our Customer Support Center.
When using this function, activate the SNMP port. (Default: Enabled)
If you failed to retrieve information of machine configuration or are using the USB interface
connection, set the information of machine configuration manually. For more information, click
Help on the screen to display Help Information.
Follow the steps below to set the option configuration.
1.
From your computers Start menu, select Printer and Faxes to display the property of your
machine.
Note Some operating systems display Printer or Devices and Printers instead of Printer and
Faxes.
2.
3-26
Click the Configuration tab.

User Guide
Product Overview
3.
Click Bi-Directional Setup.
4.
Click Get Information from Printer.
If Printer Searching Method is displayed

The machine's information is not loaded onto the print driver. Complete the following operations.
1. Select Specify Address, and click Next.

User Guide
3-27
Product Overview
2.
Enter the printer name or IP Address in the Printer Name or IP Address field.
3.
4.
Click Finish.
Click OK.
3-28

User Guide
Loading Paper
This chapter describes the paper that can be used with the machine, precautions when handling paper,
and how to load paper in trays.
Paper Types
To achieve optimum machine performance, use only paper types recommended by Xerox. Use of nonrecommended paper types may result in paper jams, lower print quality, malfunctions, or damage to
the machine.
If you wish to use paper other than the paper recommended by Xerox, contact our Customer Support
Center.
Notes
Do not use conductive paper such as origami paper, carbonic paper, or conductively-coated paper.
When a paper jam occurs, it may short-circuit the machine and eventually cause a fire.
Moisture generated by water, rain, or vapor may cause the printed images to fade. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.

User Guide
4-1
Loading Paper
Supported Paper Weights and Sheet Counts

Loadable
Quantity
Paper Tray
Basis Weight
Paper Types
Tray 1 (standard)
60 to 90 gsm
250 *1 sheets
(Up to 27 mm)
Lightweight (60-63 gsm)

Plain 1 (64-79 gsm)
Plain 2 (80-90 gsm)
Tray 2
(One Tray Module)
(Optional)
Trays 3, 4
(Two Tray Module)
(Optional)
60 to 216 gsm
500 *1 sheets
(Up to 54 mm)
Lightweight (60-63 gsm)

Plain 1 (64-79 gsm)
Plain 2 (80-90 gsm)
Heavyweight (91-169 gsm)
Extra-HW (170-216 gsm)
Tray 5 (bypass)
60 to 216 gsm
100 *2 sheets
(Up to 10 mm)
*1 When using 80 gsm paper

*2 When using Xerox standard paper
Notes
Paper jams may result if you attempt to print on a different paper type or size than the type or
size selected in the print driver, or from a tray that does not support the loaded paper. Select the
correct paper size, type, and tray to ensure successful printing.
Basis weight is the weight of one sheet of paper of 1 m2 in size.
Supported paper sizes:

Maximum: A3, 11 17" (Non-standard size: 297 432 mm)
Minimum: A5 (Non-standard size: 98 127 mm)
Duplexing (2-sided printing)
The following paper types are supported for automatic duplexing:
Lightweight (60 to 63 gsm)
Plain 1 (64 to 79 gsm)
Plain 2 (80 to 90 gsm)
Supported Paper Types

When printing or copying on commonly used paper (plain paper), use paper meeting the standards
described below. To copy or print as clear as possible, we recommend the following standard paper.
4-2

User Guide
Loading Paper
Usable Paper
In addition to the standard/semi-standard paper, the following paper also can be used.
Paper Name
Size
Weight
(gsm)
Paper Type
Baseline Paper
Xerox Business
Multipurpose
4200 20 lb.
8.5*11
75
Plain 1
Semi-Standard
Papers
Boise Cascade X-9
8.5*13
75
Plain 1
Color Xpressions
Planet20
11*17
105
Heavyweight
Colotech+90
A3
90
Plain 2
Premier 60
A4
60
Plain 1
Premier 80
A3
80
Plain 2
Premier 80
A4
80
Plain 2
Xerox Business 4200
11*17
75
Plain 1
Xerox Business 4200
8.5*14
75
Plain 1
Xerox DIGITAL
PAPER
8.5*13.4
75
Plain 1
Protucel Navigator
A4
80
Plain 2
Colotech+160
A3
160
Heavyweight
Bypass only
220
Heavyweight
Not guaranteed;
specified maximum
is 216 gsm.
Colotech+220
Notes
Bypass only
Unusable Paper
Using paper not recommended by Xerox may cause a paper jam or machine malfunction. Use paper
recommended by Xerox.
Damp or wet paper
Paper pre-printed with other printer or copying machine
Wrinkled, creased, or ripped paper
Envelopes that are not flat, or that have clasps
Color paper with surface treatments
Paper with rough surface, such as pulp paper or fibrous paper
Punched paper
Transparency film

User Guide
4-3
Loading Paper
Storing and Handling Paper

Please keep the following points in mind when storing paper
Store paper inside a cabinet or other dry place. Paper that has absorbed moisture can result in
paper jams and lower image quality.
After opening a package of paper, wrap and store any remaining paper. We recommend that you
store remaining paper in moisture prevention packets.
Store paper on a flat surface to prevent bends or warping.
Please adhere to the following points when loading paper in a tray
Align the stack of paper neatly before loading it in a tray.
Do not use creased or wrinkled paper.
Do not use warped or curled paper.
Do not load paper of mixed sizes together into a tray.
Take care not to touch the print side. Oils from your skin could adhere to the print media, which
could affect printing quality. If unavoidable, be sure to use a finger cot, gloves, or other means to
cover your fingers before touching the print media.
LEF is recommended for heavyweight media feeds from the Tray 5 (bypass). If a misfeed occurs,
please apply an intentional upper curl to the leading edge of the paper.
Do not load paper above the maximum fill line in Trays 1 to 5. It may cause paper jams.
When Heavyweight Paper/Extra-HW Paper is supplied to Tray 5 and causes paper jams, reduce the
paper quantity or turn over the paper in Tray 5.
4-4

User Guide
Loading Paper
Loading Paper
Types of paper loaded in trays
The machine automatically detects the size and orientation of paper loaded in a tray, but the paper
type must be set manually. Each tray's default paper type setting is Plain 1 paper. Change the paper
type setting when loading a different type of paper. You can also set a non-standard paper size as
Custom Size paper in Tray 5 (the bypass tray).
For information on how to change the paper type setting, refer to Changing the Paper Settings on
page 4-11.
Automatic Paper Selection
When processing a print job, specify the settings in the print driver's screen by selecting Automatically
Select for Select By Tray under Paper in the Paper/Output tab. The machine automatically selects a
tray to match the specified document size and orientation. This function is called Automatic Paper
Selection.
To activate Automatic Paper Selection when copying, set Paper Supply to Auto.
The Automatic Paper Selection function selects the trays in order from Tray 1 > Tray 2 > Tray 3 > Tray 4
> Tray 5 if there is more than one paper tray that matches.
Notes
Trays 2 to 4 are optional components.
When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, the tray switches to the next tray
containing paper of the same size and orientation or the tray set in priority. If the tray containing
paper of a different size or orientation is selected and runs out of paper again, the printing process
is paused until paper is loaded instead of switching to the next tray (Auto Paper Selection
function).
For more information on setting the Auto Paper Selection function, refer to Auto Paper Selection on
page 9-48.

User Guide
4-5
Loading Paper
Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4 (Optional)

When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing and an error code is displayed on the
machine status diagram, add paper to the tray. Copying or printing automatically resumes when paper
is added.
Note Fan the paper well before loading it in the tray. This prevents pages from sticking to each other
and reduces paper jams.
For information on how to change the paper size and orientation in a tray, refer to Changing the
Paper Size for Trays 1 to 4 on page 4-9.
1.
Pull out the tray until it stops.
Notes
While the machine is copying or printing, do not pull out the tray that the job uses.
To prevent paper jams or loading errors, do not load different sizes or types of paper on top of any
remaining paper in a tray.
Pulling out all the trays at once could cause the machine to tilt or fall, causing injury.
2.
4-6
For Tray 1, push down the metal plate to the bottom of the tray.

User Guide
Loading Paper
3.
Load the paper with the side to be copied or printed facing up. Align the leading edge of the paper
with the left side of the tray.
Notes
Do not load paper above the maximum fill line. Doing so could cause paper jams or machine
malfunctions.
Do not place any paper or objects in the empty space on the right side of Tray 1 or 2. Doing so
could cause paper jams or machine malfunctions.
4. Push the tray in gently until it stops.
Note When pushing the tray in, do it slowly. Pushing the tray with too much force could cause machine
malfunctions.
Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass)

When printing or copying on the paper that cannot be set in Tray 1 to 4, use Tray 5 (bypass).
For printing, specify the settings on the Paper/Output tab using the print driver. Also specify the type of
paper to be loaded.
Notes
To prevent paper jams or loading errors, do not remove paper from its packaging until needed.
Fan the paper well before loading it in a tray. This prevents the pages from sticking to each other
and reduces paper jams.
When paper is loaded into Tray 5 (bypass), Tray 5 is automatically selected and the screen for
setting the paper size and type is displayed. For more information, refer to Paper Supply on
page 5-17.
1. Open Tray 5 (bypass).
Note If necessary, pull out the extension tray. Pull out the extension tray gently.

User Guide
4-7
Loading Paper
2.
Load paper with the side to be copied or printed on facing down, inserting the paper until its edge
lightly touches against the paper feed entrance.
Notes
Do not load mixed paper types in a tray.
Do not load paper above the maximum fill line. Doing so could cause paper jams or machine
malfunctions.
The machine may not be able to feed or create the desired print quality for some types of
heavyweight paper.
3. Gently align the paper guides to the loaded paper.
4.
4-8
Execute the copy or print operation.

User Guide
Loading Paper
Changing Paper Size

This section describes how to change paper size in Trays 1 to 4.
Notes
Do not load mixed paper sizes into a tray.
A paper type is preset for Trays 1 to 4. Normally, Plain 1 is set for the trays. When changing it to a
different paper type, change the paper quality settings to match the type of paper to be loaded so
that you can maintain high quality printing. For more information on how to set the paper quality,
refer to Changing the Paper Settings on page 4-11.
Changing the Paper Size for Trays 1 to 4

1.
Pull out the tray until it stops.
Notes
While the machine is copying or printing, do not pull out the tray that the job uses.
To prevent paper jams or loading errors, do not load different sizes or types of paper on top of any
remaining paper in a tray.
2. Remove any paper loaded in the tray.
3. For Tray 1, push down the metal plate to the bottom of the tray.

User Guide
4-9
Loading Paper
4.
While pinching the two paper guide levers, move them to the edges of the paper.
5.
Load the paper with the side to copy or print on facing up. Align the leading edge of the paper
with the left side of the tray.
Note Do not load paper above the maximum fill line. Doing so could cause paper jams or machine
malfunctions.
6.
Push the tray in gently until it stops.
Notes
When pushing the tray in, do it slowly. Pushing the tray with too much force could cause machine
malfunctions.
Affix the paper size label to the front of the tray.
4-10

User Guide
Loading Paper
Changing the Paper Settings

This section describes how to change the paper type setting for a tray.
A paper type is preset for Trays 1 to 4. Normally, Plain 1 is set for the trays. To maintain the same print
quality after changing paper in a different quality in the same tray, you need to change the paper
quality setting for the tray that matches new paper loaded.
For more information, refer to Supported Paper Types on page 4-2.
For information on the paper size setting for Tray 5, refer to Tray 5 on page 5-18.
1.
Log In/Out button
2.

[
Notes
The passcode is initially set to "1111" (four "1" digits).
The Log In/Out button lights up when the machine is in System Administration mode.
3. Select Tray Settings, and then press the OK button.
Tools
Default Settings...
Device Information...
Tray Settings...

User Guide
4-11
Loading Paper
4.
Select the desired paper tray, and then press the OK button.
Tray Settings
Tray 1...
Tray 2...
Tray 3...
5.
Select Paper Type, and then press the OK button.
Tray 1
Paper Type...
Plain 1
Note If you select Tray 5 (bypass), Paper Size and Paper Type are displayed. To change the paper size,
select Paper Size.
6.
Select the desired paper type, and then press the OK button.
Paper Type
Plain 1
Plain 2
Lightweight
7.
Press the control panel's Log In/Out button.
Note The Log In/Out button light goes out when the machine has exited System Administration
mode.
4-12

User Guide
Copy
Copying Procedure
This section describes the basic copy procedures.
Placing the Document

The following two methods are available to load documents:
Document feeder
Single sheet
Multiple sheets
Document glass
Shingle sheet
Bound documents, such as book
Note The document feeder is not available for some models. An optional component is required.
Contact your local Xerox representative.
Document Feeder
Supported document sizes
You can place documents of the standard sizes in the document feeder.
When a document is placed in the document feeder, the machine detects the document size
automatically. The following standard size documents are detected automatically: A3 , B4 , A4 ,
A4 , B5 , B5 , A5 , 11 17" , 8.5 14" , 8.5 13" , 8.5 11" , 8.5 11" , 8K , 16K
, and16K .
Notes
You can select one of the following alternative document sizes:
8.5 14"
or 8.5 13"
B5
or 16K
When using a 2-sided document in the document feeder, make sure to set Original - Binding
Position properly.

User Guide
5-1
Copy
Supported documents types (weights)

Documents with weights from 38 to 128 gsm (50 to 128 gsm for 2-sided documents) can be placed in
the document feeder and scanned.
The document feeder accepts the following number of sheets.
Document type (gsm)
Number of sheets
110 sheets
Plain (50 to 80 gsm)
110 sheets
Heavyweight (81 to 128 gsm)
75 sheets
Note To avoid paper jams, use the document glass for mixed size, folded, wrinkled, cut-and-pasted
documents, curled paper, or carbon-backed paper. If you can flatten the curled document, you can use
it.
Follow the steps below to place documents in the document feeder.
You can place single or multiple sheet documents.
1. Remove any paper clips or staples from the document before placing it in the document feeder.
2. Place the document in the center of the document feeder, with the side to copy (or the front
surface of a 2-sided document) facing up.
3.
5-2
Align the document guides to each side of the document.

User Guide
Copy
4.
Open the document stopper.
Document Glass
Document sizes supporting automatic detection
The document size is detected automatically when Original Size is set to Auto.
The following document sizes are detected automatically: A3
, 11 17" , 8.5 11" , 8K , 16K , and 16K .
, B4
, A4
, A4
, B5
, B5
, A5
Notes
When copying multiple pages of a document, the document size of the first document page is set
to copy the rest of the document.
The machine automatically determines the tray holding the appropriate paper, based on the
document size and the specified zoom ratio.
You can select one of the following document sizes for using the document glass.
A3 , B4 , A4 , A4 , B5 , B5
11" , 8K , 16K , and 16K .
, A5
, 11 17"
, 8.5 14"
, 8.5 13"
, 8.5 11"
, 8.5
Notes
When Original Size is set to Auto, an error screen appears when you place a non-standard size
document on the document glass. In this case, select a document size manually by selecting
Original Size from the menu items. Depending on the selected document size, the printout may
be too large for the paper or may have shadows at the edges.
You can select a custom paper size specified for Tray 5 (bypass) using the Custom Paper Size
Settings. For more information, refer to Custom Paper Size Settings on page 9-18.
CAUTION: Do not apply excessive force to hold a thick document on the document glass. Doing
so may break the glass and cause injuries.
Follow the steps below to place a document on the document glass.

User Guide
5-3
Copy
You can place a single sheet document or bound document, such as a book, on the document glass.
1. Open the document cover.
Note When using the document glass, make sure to close the document cover after finishing your copy
job.
2.
Place the document face down and align it against the top left corner of the document glass.
3.
Close the document cover.
5-4

User Guide
Copy
Advanced Settings
Notes
The settings displayed may vary according to model.
You may need to enter a passcode to use the copy feature. Ask your system administrator for the
passcode.
1. Press the Copy button.
Copy button
2.
Make advanced settings as needed.
Copy
Paper Supply...
Reduce/Enlarge...
Pages per Side...
111
Auto
Auto
Off
Note Refer to Advanced Copy Settings on page 5-13.
Entering the Number of Copies

You can enter a value between 1 and 999 for the number of copies.
1. Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired number of copies.
Numeric keypad

User Guide
5-5
Copy
The entered value appears in the machine status diagram.
Copy
Paper Supply...
Reduce/Enlarge...
Pages per Side...
111
12
Auto
Auto
Off
Note If you entered an incorrect value, press the C (Clear) button, and then enter the correct value.
C (Clear) button
Starting the Copy Job

1.
Press the Start button.

Start button
Notes
If the document is placed in the document feeder, do not press down on the document while it is
being fed through the machine.
If a problem occurs, an error code appears on the screen. For information on error codes, refer to
Error Codes on page 13-32.
5-6

User Guide
Copy
Placing a Document on the Document Glass

Copying documents of non-standard sizes
An error screen appears when you place a non-standard size document on the document glass. In this
case, select a document size manually by selecting Original Size from the menu items.
Note Depending on the selected document size, the printout may be too large for the paper or may
have shadows at the edges.
Copy
111
Reduce/Enlarge...
Pages per Side...
Original Size...
Auto
Off
Auto
Copying multiple sets of documents

You can continue copying multiple sets of documents using any of the following settings:
Collated: On
2 Sided: 1 2 Sided, 2 2 Sided
Pages per Side: 2 Pages or 4 Pages
ID Card Copy: On
1. After the first page of a document is scanned, the Next original? message appears. Select Yes,
and then press the OK button.
Note If there is no other page, select No, and then press the OK button.
Copy
[Copying...]
Qty. 3
Next original?
No
Yes
2.
Place the next page of the document in the machine, select Continue, and then press the OK
button.
Notes
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 as many times as needed.
If there is no other page, select Cancel, and then press the OK button.
Copy
[Copying...]
Qty. 3
Load your next original
Continue
Cancel

User Guide
5-7
Copy
3.
After you place all of the document pages in the machine, select No when Next original? appears,
and then click the OK button.
Copy
[Copying...]
Qty. 3
Next original?
No
Yes
About Auto Rotation

The copy feature supports the Auto Rotation function that the machine automatically prints a scanned
page to fit onto a page of paper by rotating the scanned image although the orientation of the
document is different from the paper loaded in the tray.
You can set this feature in the following cases:
The tray selection is set to automatic.
The zoom ratio is set to automatic.
The zoom ratio is set to 100% and both document and paper are the same size.
The Pages per Side function is used.
If none of the above conditions applied when copying, the machine does not perform Auto
Rotation, which may result in a part of the image to be missing.
5-8

User Guide
Copy
Operations Performed While Copying

While the machine is copying, you can cancel the currently executing job, and check or cancel pending
jobs.
Stopping a Copy Job

To cancel the currently copying job press the Stop button.
Stop button
Checking Job Status

Follow the steps below to check the status of the copy job being executed, or the status of a copy job
waiting to start (a pending job).
Note You can cancel the currently executing copy job or a pending copy job.
For more information on operation in job screen, refer to Canceling the Current Job on page 11-3.
1. Press the Job Status button.
Job Statusbutton
2.
Check the job status.
Active Jobs
Print
Print
Scan
3.
[Stop]:Delete
A3
A4
01 PC1
After checking the job status, press the Job Status button again.

User Guide
5-9
Copy
ID Card Copy
You can copy both sides of an ID card (name card, employee card, etc.) on one side of paper.
Press the ID Card Copy button to enable this feature.
Original document
Original orientation
Copied output
Front side
Front side
Back side
Back side
Notes
Place an ID card in the upright position.
Setting ID Card Copy to On automatically sets Reduce/Enlarge to 100%. You can change the
zoom ratio manually.
Follow the steps below to use the ID Card Copy feature.
1. Place an ID card face down at least 5mm away from the top left corner of the document glass,
and then close the document cover.
Placing the ID card too close to the corner of the document glass may not copy the edge of the ID
card properly.
5-10

User Guide
Copy
2.
Press the ID Card Copy button.
Notes
For your assistance, follow the guidance of ID Card Copy displayed on the screen.
To copy an ID Card with its four edges, select Photo & Text or Photo by pressing the Original Type
button.
ID Card Copy button
3.

The following settings are also available by:
-
Lighten/Darken - Press the Lighten/Darken button.

Original Type - Press the Original Type button.
For more information, refer to Advanced Copy Settings on page 5-13.
ID Card Copy
Paper Supply...
Reduce/Enlarge...
4.
1
Auto
Auto

Start button
To finish scanning to print only one side of the ID card, select Cancel, and then press the OK
button.
ID Card Copy [Copying...]
Qty. 1
Load your next original?

Continue
Cancel

User Guide
5-11
Copy
5.
6.
To continue scanning the other side of the ID card, place the other side of the ID card face down
slightly away from the top left corner of the document glass, and then close the document cover.
Select Continue, and then press the OK button to start printing two sides of the ID card.
ID Card Copy [Copying...]
Qty. 1
Load your next original?

Continue
Cancel
5-12

User Guide
Copy
Advanced Copy Settings

Feature
Description
See
page
Lighten/Darken*1
Adjusts the copy density.
P. 5-14
Original Type*1*2
Sets the document type.
P. 5-15
2 Sided*1
Used to select 1 Sided or 2 Sided copying.
P. 5-16
Collated
Sets the output method to use when making

multiple sets of copies.
P. 5-17
Paper Supply*1
Sets the tray to use.
P. 5-17
Reduce/Enlarge*1
Sets a reduction or enlargement factor.
P. 5-19
Pages per Side
Used to copy multiple documents on a single

page.
P. 5-20
Original Size*2
Sets the document size.
P. 5-20
Original - Binding Position
Sets the binding position of documents.
P. 5-22
Output - Binding Position
Sets the binding position of the outputs.
P. 5-22
Edge Erase*1*2
Sets the value for the Edge Erase function used

to eliminate shadows.
P. 5-23
1 You
2 You
can change the default value of the Copy functions.

can change the default value of the ID Card Copy functions.
For more information on defaults that can be changed, and how to change them, refer to Default
1. Press the Copy button.
Copy button

User Guide
5-13
Copy
2.
Select the desired setting as needed.
Copy
111
Auto
Auto
Off
Paper Supply...
Reduce/Enlarge...
Pages per Side...
Lighten/Darken
You can set the density from five levels. The farther left the position of
farther right, the lighter and toner saver mode.
1. Press the Lighten/Darken button.
, the darker the copy; the
2.
Brightness level and Toner Saver changes every time the Lighten/Darken button is pressed. The
selection is applied when the screen returns to the main menu screen without pressing the OK
button.
You can change the displayed time length of the setting screen.
For more information on changing the displayed time length of the setting screen, refer to QuickButton Selection Timer on page 10-12.
5-14
Dark +2
Creates copies with the darkest density. Use this setting to scan
documents containing light objects.
Dark +1
Creates copies with a fairly dark density. Use this setting to scan
documents containing fairly light objects.
Normal
Creates copies with the same density as the document.
Light +1
Creates copies with a fairly light density. Use this setting to scan
documents containing fairly dark objects.

User Guide
Copy
Light +2
Creates copies with the lightest density. Use this setting to scan
documents containing dark objects.
Toner saver
Creates copies using less amount of toner with the following

settings.
Lighten/Darken: Lighten +2
Sharpness: Sharpen +2
Original Type: Photo & Text
Note: Toner Saver cannot be selected for ID Card copy.
Original Type
You can set the type of document to optimize copies.
1. Press the Original Type button.
2.
The selection of a document type changes everytime the Original Type button is pressed. The
selection is applied when the screen is returned to the main menu screen without pressing the OK
button.
Name
Description
Text (default)
Select this option when the document contains sharp black and white objects such
as text.
Photo & Text
Select this option when the document contains both text and photos.
Photo
Select this option when the document contains only photos.

User Guide
5-15
Copy
2 Sided
You can set the machine to scan a 1-sided or 2-sided document, or copy to one or both sides of the
paper.
Notes
This feature is available when the duplex output unit is installed on the machine.
You can select 21 Sided or 22 Sided when document is placed in the document feeder.
(The document feeder must be installed.)
When placing document on the document glass, you can only select either 11 Sided or 12
Sided.
12 Sided and 22 Sided can only be used with Lightweight, Plain 1, and Plain 2 paper quality.
1. Press the 2 Sided button.
2 Sided button
2.
The selection of a copy method changes everytime the 2 Sided button is pressed. The selection is
applied when the screen is returned to the main menu screen without pressing the OK button.
5-16
11 Sided
Copies a 1-sided document to one side of the paper. The copy appears the same as
the original.
1 2 Sided
Copies a 1-sided document to both sides of the paper.
21 Sided
Copies a 2-sided document to one side of the paper.
22 Sided
Copies a 2-sided document to both sides of the paper. The copy appears the same
as the original.

User Guide
Copy
Collate
You can set the output method for copying sets of multiple documents.
1. Press the Collated/Resolution button.
2.
The selection of an output method changes everytime the Collated/Resolution button is pressed.
The selection is applied when the screen is returned to the main menu screen without pressing the
OK button.
Copy
Collated button
111
Off
On
On(Rotate)
Off
Uncollated. The machine does not sort copy sets. The machine copies the specified
number of copy sets one after another.
On
The machine outputs sheets sorted into sets that are arranged in page order.
When a document is placed in the document feeder, it automatically turns on. You
can also change the setting to off manually.
On (Rotate)
The machine outputs sheets sorted into sets that are arranged in page order by
alternating between landscape and portrait orientations.
Use A4, B5, Letter, or 16K paper size with the document oriented in the same
direction.
Paper Supply
1.
Select Paper Supply, and then press the OK button.
Copy
Paper Supply...
Reduce/Enlarge...
Pages per Side...
111
Auto
Auto
Off

User Guide
5-17
Copy
2.
Select the desired paper tray, and then press the OK button.
Paper Supply
Qty.
Auto
Tray 1:A4
Tray 2:A3
Auto
The machine selects the appropriate paper tray automatically based on the document size.
Tray 1 to Tray 4
Select one of the installed trays. The indicator moves to the selected tray every time the Paper Supply
button is pressed.
Note Tray 2 to Tray 4 display when the optional paper trays are mounted.
Tray 5
Select the paper size and paper type.
There are standard sizes and preset paper sizes (Custom 1 to 5).
For more information on the preset sizes, refer to Custom Paper Size Settings on page 9-18.
Tray 5
Qty.
A3
Plain 1
Paper Size...
Paper Type...
Select Custom Size to set a non-standard paper size. You can set a Y direction (vertical) between 127
and 297 mm (in 1 mm increments), and X direction (horizontal) between 98 and 432 mm (in 1 mm
increments).
Custom Size
Y: 127-297mm
210 mm
Qty.
X: 98-432mm
297 mm
5-18

User Guide
Copy
Reduce/Enlarge
You can set the copying zoom ratio.
1. Select Reduce/Enlarge, and then press the OK button.
Copy
Paper Supply...
Reduce/Enlarge...
Pages per Side...
2.
111
Auto
Auto
Off
Select the reduction/enlargement factor, and then press the OK button.
Reduce/Enlarge
Qty.
[25-400] Auto
Auto 50% A3 A5
- + 70% A3 A4,B4 B5
In the machine status diagram, the selected zoom ratio is displayed on the Reduce/Enlarge display.
100%
The machine makes the copy the same size as the document.
Note: Use the numeric keypad or and buttons to set the desired
reduction/enlargement zoom ratio. You can set a value between 25 and 400% (in
1% increments).
Auto
The machine automatically sets an appropriate zoom ratio by calculating the

document size and the paper size specified in Paper Supply, to enable the document
to fit on the page.
Fixed zoom ratio
The machine reduces or enlarges the copy according to the selected zoom ratio.
Preset XXX%
The machine reduces/enlarges copies by the set zoom ratio.

The value displayed as the preset reduction/enlargement zoom ratio is the value set
by selecting Tools > Copy Settings > Reduce/Enlarge Preset in System
Administration mode.
Magnification Table
When you make enlarged or reduced copies from standard size documents on standard size paper, the
following copy ratios will apply.
Copy /
Documents
A5
B5
A4
B4
A3
A5
100%
122%
141%
174%
200%
B5
81%
100%
115%
141%
163%
A4
70%
86%
100%
122%
141%

User Guide
5-19
Copy
Copy /
Documents
A5
B5
A4
B4
A3
B4
58%
70%
81%
100%
115%
A3
50%
61%
70%
86%
100%
Pages per Side

Use this setting to copy 2 or 4 documents together on the same page.
Selecting Pages per Side automatically sets a zoom ratio that will enable the documents to fit on the
page.
Notes
Place the document in an upright position.
When using a 2-sided document in the document feeder, make sure to set Original - Binding
Position properly.
Setting Pages per Side automatically sets the Reduce/Enlarge setting to automatic.
The zoom ratio is adjusted automatically within the range of 25% to 400%.
1. Select Pages per Side, and then press the OK button.
Copy
Paper Supply...
Reduce/Enlarge...
Pages per Side...
2.
111
Auto
Auto
Off
Select the desired item, and then press the OK button.
Pages per Side
Qty.
Off
2 Pages
4 Pages
Off
Disables the Pages per Side feature.
2 Pages
Copies 2 pages of a document to a single sheet of paper.
4 Pages
Copies 4 pages of a document to a single sheet of paper.
Original Size
You can set the document size and orientation.
5-20

User Guide
Copy
After placing the document on the document glass, make sure to set the size and orientation of the
document.
Note If the document size is larger than the original size, the image may be cut off or may have
shadows at the edges. Make sure to choose an appropriate document size.
1.
Select Original Size , and then press the OK button.
Copy
Reduce/Enlarge...
Pages per Side...
Original Size...
2.
111
Auto
Off
Auto
Select the document size, and then press the OK button.
Original Size
Qty.
Auto
A3 (297x420mm)
A4 (297x210mm)
Auto
The machine automatically detects the document size from among the
supported standard sizes.
Fixed document size

(preset)
Select the size of the placed document.

Original Size is automatically set to Auto when the document is placed in the
document feeder.
Customs 1 to 5
You can select the registered paper size.

For information on registering Customs 1 to 5, refer to Custom Paper Size Settings
on page 9-18.
Custom Size
Select Custom Size to set a non-standard document size. You can set a Y direction
(vertical) between 86 and 297 mm (in 1 mm increments), and X direction
(horizontal) between 86 and 432 mm (in 1 mm increments).

User Guide
5-21
Copy
Original - Binding Position

You can set the position when binding documents.
1. Select Output - Binding Position, and then press the OK button.
Copy
111
Auto
Original Size...
Original-Binding Po...Flip on Long
Output-Binding Posi...Flip on Long
1.
Select the binding position, and then press the OK button.
Output-Binding Position
Qty.
Flip on Long Edge

Flip on Short Edge
Flip on Long Edge
Binds the long edge of document in portrait orientation.
Flip on Short Edge
Binds the short edge of document in landscape orientation.
Output - Binding Position

You can set the position when binding output copies.
1. Select Output - Binding Position, and then press the OK button.
Copy
111
Auto
Original Size...
Original-Binding Po...Flip on Long
Output-Binding Posi...Flip on Long
2.
Select the binding position, and then press the OK button.
Output-Binding Position
Qty.
Flip on Long Edge

Flip on Short Edge
5-22
Flip on Long Edge
Binds the long edge of document in portrait orientation.
Flip on Short Edge
Binds the short edge of document in landscape orientation.

User Guide
Copy
Edge Erase
You can set to erase the black shadows created around the edge of the paper when copying with the
document cover open or copying a bound document.
You can set a value between 0 and 50 mm (in 1 mm increments) for the Edge Erase feature.
Notes
The value set for Edge Erase applies to all four edges of the document.
For ID card copy, Edge Erase is set separately. For more information, refer to Edge Erase on page 910.
1. Select Edge Erase, and then press the OK button.
Copy
111
Original-Binding...
Output-Binding P...
Edge Erase...
2.
Flip on Long
Flip on Long
2mm
Use the numeric keypad to enter a value, and then press the OK button.
Edge Erase
Qty.
[0 - 50]
2 OO

User Guide
5-23
Copy
Managing the Copy Paper with Accounting

You can manage copy paper usage for up to 30 users.
You can set the passcode and maximum number of copied impressions permitted for each user.
The following features are available with the Accounting function.
Display/set the password.
Display the total number of copied impressions.
Display/set the maximum number of impressions permitted for copying.
Clear the total number of impressions.
To enable Accounting: User Control on page 9-48
Items available with Accounting: User Management on page 9-52
Operations when Using the Copy Feature

The operation procedure differs depending on the account mode you are using.
For more information, refer to Account Modes on page 3-20.
Checking the Total Number of Impressions Copied

The machine can display the total number of impressions each user has copied and the maximum
number of impressions each user is permitted to copy.
This function can be used when managing the copy paper.
For more information, refer to User Management on page 9-52.
5-24

User Guide
Fax
Overview of Fax Operations
The basic flow of fax operations including placing document in the machine, setting the recipient
address, and making advanced settings is described below.
You must set the Region and Clock items to use the Fax feature. For more information, refer to Region
on page 9-38 and System Settings on page 9-42.
Placing a Document
The following two methods are available to place a document:
Document feeder
Single sheet
Multiple sheets
Document glass
Single sheet
Bound documents, such as books
Document Feeder
You can place standard size document in the document feeder.
A4 , B5 , B5 *, A5 , 11 17" , 8.5 14" *, 8.5 13" *, 8.5 11" , 8.5 11" , 8K ,
16K , and 16K *.
Notes
-
B5
(default) or 16K
8.5 14"
(default) or 8.5 13"

User Guide
6-1
Fax
When a document containing pages of different sizes is placed in the machine, the machine uses
the largest document size to scan the document.
The paper size for fax transmissions is different from the document sizes supporting automatic
detection. For more information, refer to Original Size on page 6-20.

Documents with weights from 38 to 128 gsm (50 to 128 gsm for 2 Sided documents) can be placed in
Document Type (gsm)
Number of Sheets
110 sheets
110 sheets
75 sheets
the document.
Follow the steps below to place document in the document feeder.
You can place a single or multiple pages of a document.
1. Remove any paper clips or staples from document before placing it in the document feeder.
2. Place the document in the center of the document feeder, with the side to be scanned (or the
front surface of a 2 Sided document) facing up.
3.
6-2
Align the document guides to each side of document.

User Guide
Fax
4.
Document Glass
, 11 17" , 8.5 11" , 8K , 16K , and 16K .
, B4
, A4
, A4
, B5
, B5
*, A5

You can select one of the following document sizes from Original Size.
A3
, B4
, A4
, A4
, B5
, B5
*, A5
, 11 17"
, 8.5 14"
,8.5 13"
, and 8K
Notes
When Original Size is set to Auto, an error screen appears when you place a non-standard size
document on the document glass. In this case, select a document size manually by selecting
Original Size from the menu items. Select the document size from this screen. Depending on the
selected document size, the printout may be too large for paper or may have shadows at the
edges.
The paper size for fax transmissions is different from the document sizes supporting automatic
detection. For more information, refer to Original Size on page 6-20.
CAUTION: Do not apply excessive force to hold thick document on the document glass. It may
break the glass and cause injuries.
Follow the steps below to place a document on the document glass.

User Guide
6-3
Fax
You can place a single sheet document or bound document such as book on the document glass.
Note When using the document glass, make sure to close the document cover after finishing your
copy job.
2.
Place document face down, and align it against the top left corner of the document glass.
3.
6-4

User Guide
Fax
Specifying the Recipient

Follow the steps below to specify the fax recipient.
Note Check the recipient before sending a fax.
1.
Press the Fax button.

Fax button
Note You must enter the Region setting to use the Fax feature. If a message asking you to set the
region appears when you press Fax button, set your region.
For information on how to make the setting, refer to Region on page 9-38.
2.
Select Recipient, and then press the OK button.
Enter Recipient
Recipient...
Resolution...
Original Type...
Standard
Text
Note You can also specify the fax recipient using the control panel buttons.
For information on how to use the control panel buttons, refer to Using the Control Panel Buttons
to Specify the Fax Recipient on page 6-12.
3.
Select how you want to specify the fax recipient.
Recipient
Keypad...
Speed Dial...
Phone Book...
Using the numeric keypad
To use the numeric keypad to enter the fax recipient's number directly:
1. Select Keypad, and then press the OK button.

User Guide
6-5
Fax
2.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the fax recipient's number.
Enter Fax Number

_
3.
Notes
To delete the entered numbers, press the C (Clear) button.
You can enter fax numbers of up to 50 digits in length.
Press the OK button.
Using the Speed Dial function

To specify the fax recipient by entering a Speed Dial number (001 to 099) registered in the Phone
Book:
1. Select Speed Dial, and then press the OK button.
2. Use the numeric keypad to enter the Speed Dial number.
Speed Dial (001-099)

[_ ]
Note To delete the entered numbers, press the C (Clear) button.

3.
Using the Phone Book

To specify the fax recipient by retrieving a Phone Book entry:
1. Select Phone Book, and then press the OK button.
2. Select the desired fax recipient.
Note You can press the # button to check the fax number. Press the Back button to return the
display to the previous screen.
3.
6-6

User Guide
Fax
Using the Group function

To retrieve a Phone Book entry to send the same fax to all the members of a registered group of fax
recipients:
1. Select Group, and then press the OK button.
2. Select the desired group of fax recipients.
Group
[#]:Info,[OK]:Save
01 Group01
02 Group02
03 Group03
Note You can press the # button to check the recipients registered in the selected group. Press the
Back button to return the display to the previous screen.
3.
Making Advanced Settings

Notes
The displayed settings may vary according to models.
You may need to enter a passcode to use the copy feature. Ask your system administrator for the
passcode.
1. Make advanced settings as needed.
Example: Screen for selecting the fax recipient from among the Speed Dial entries
For more information on advanced settings, refer to Advanced Fax Settings on page 6-17.

User Guide
6-7
Fax
Starting the Fax Job

1.

Start button
Notes
If the document is placed in the document feeder, do not press down on the document while
it is being fed through the machine.
If the memory becomes full when document is being scanned, the machine continues to send
by scanning and sending one page at a time.
The maximum number of pages that can be scanned for a single scan command is 250
pages. The machine automatically starts sending the scanned pages once 250 pages of a
document have been scanned.
If a problem occurs, an error message appears in the display. Follow the instructions in the
message to solve the problem.
Placing a Document on the Document Glass

Copying a document of non-standard size
An error screen appears when you place a non-standard size document on the document glass. In this
case, select a document size manually by selecting Original Size from the menu items.
Ready to Fax: 0123457890

Original Type...
Lighten/Darken...
Original Size...
Text
Normal
Auto
Note Depending on the selected document size, the printout may be too large for the paper or may
have shadows at the edges.
6-8

User Guide
Fax
When sending faxes of multiple pages of a document

Faxes of multiple pages of a document can be sent using a single start operation.
1. After the first document is scanned, the Next original? message appears. Select Yes, and then
press the OK button.
Fax
[Scanning...]
Next original?
No
Yes
2.
Fax
Notes
If there is no other page, select No, and then press the OK button.
If a Memory Full message appears, the scanned data is sent automatically.
Place the next page of the document on the document glass, select Continue, and then press the
OK button.
[Scanning...]
Load your next original

Continue
Cancel
3.
Fax
Notes
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 as many times as needed.
If there is no other page, select Cancel, and then press the OK button.
When you completed scanning all the documents, select No when Next original? appears, and
then click the OK button.
[Scanning...]
Next original?
No
Yes

User Guide
6-9
Fax
Operations During Faxing (Sending)

You can cancel the fax currently being sent, and check or cancel pending jobs.
Canceling the Fax Being Sent

To cancel the fax currently being sent:
1. Press the Stop button.
Stop button
Checking Job Status

Follow the steps below to check the status of the fax job currently being executed, or the status of a fax
job waiting to start (a pending job).
Note You can cancel the fax job currently being executed, or pending fax jobs.
For more information on operation in job screen, refer to Canceling a Pending Fax Job on page 11-4.
Job Status button
2.
Select Fax (Send), and then press the OK button.
Active Jobs
[Stop]:Delete
Fax(Send)...
3.
4.
6-10

After checking the job status, press the Job Status button again.
User Guide
Fax
Operations During Faxing (Receiving)

You can cancel the fax currently being received.
Canceling the Fax Being Received

To cancel the fax currently being received.
Stop button
2.
Select the fax job that you want to cancel, and then press the OK button.
Fax
[Printing...]
Delete the received data?

No
Yes
-
Select No when you want to cancel printing and save the received data.
Select Yes when you want to cancel printing and delete the received data.
Note You can also cancel the received fax from the Active Jobs screen.
For more information on the Active Jobs screen, refer to Canceling the Current Job on page 11-3.

User Guide
6-11
Fax
Using the Control Panel Buttons to Specify the

Fax Recipient
You can use the control panel buttons to specify the fax recipient.
Using the Numeric Keypad

To use the numeric keypad to enter the fax recipient's number directly:
1. Press the Fax button.
Fax button
The Enter Recipient screen displays.
Enter Recipient
Recipient...
Resolution...
Original Type...
2.
Standard
Text
With the Recipient item selected, use the numeric keypad to enter the recipient's fax number.
Enter Fax Number
[OK]:Save
0123456789_
Note You can enter the fax numbers of up to 50 digits in length.

3.
Using the One Touch Panels

You can specify the fax recipient using the One Touch panel. The fax numbers registered for each One
Touch button are the same as the fax numbers registered for Speed Dial entries 001 to 036.
6-12

User Guide
Fax
For example, to specify the fax recipient registered for Speed Dial 001, press the One Touch button 1.
Notes
The One Touch buttons have sensors to detect which set of buttons (1 to 12, 13 to 24, or 25 to 36)
is activated. Turn over the One Touch panel completely before pressing the One Touch buttons.
Take care not to place objects or spill liquids near the One Touch panel.
For information on how to register a Speed Dial entry, refer to Speed Dial on page 9-21.
1.

Fax button
Enter Recipient
Recipient...
Resolution...
Original Type...
2.
Standard
Text
Press a One Touch button.

One Touch button
1
10
11
12
Example: Screen displayed when the One Touch button 1 is pressed to select 001 John Smith.
Note To specify a Speed Dial number higher than 013, turn over the panel.
3.

User Guide
6-13
Fax
Using the Address Book Button

Press the Address Book button to display Phone Book entries you can browse through to find the
desired recipient.
You can send a fax to a recipient registered as a Phone Book Speed Dial entry, or to multiple recipients
registered as a Group entry.
Fax button
Enter Recipient
Recipient...
Resolution...
Original Type...
2.
Standard
Text
Press the Address Book button.

Address Book button
3.
Select the desired fax recipient.
Sending a fax to a recipient registered as a Speed Dial entry

1. Select All Entries, and then press the OK button.
Recipient
All Entries...
Group...
6-14

User Guide
Fax
2.
Select the desired recipient, and then press the OK button.
Note After selecting a recipient, you can press the # button to check the fax number. Press the
Sending a fax to a group of recipients registered as a Group entry
1. Select Group, and then press the OK button.
Recipient
All Entries...
Group...
2.
Select the desired group, and then press the OK button.
Group
[#]:Info,[OK]:Save
01 Group01
02 Group02
03 Group03
Note You can press the # button to check the recipients registered in the selected group. Press the

User Guide
6-15
Fax
Using the Speed Dial Button

To specify the fax recipient by entering a Speed Dial number directly in the Speed Dial input screen:
Fax button
Enter Recipient
Recipient...
Resolution...
Original Type...
2.
Standard
Text
With the Recipient item selected, press the Speed Dial button.
Speed Dial button
3.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired Speed Dial number.
Speed Dial (001-099)

[_ ]
Example: The screen appears when the Speed Dial 001 is entered.
4.
6-16

User Guide
Fax
Advanced Fax Settings

This section describes the advanced functions available for the Fax feature.
Setting Item
Description
See Page:
Resolution*
Sets the scan resolution.
P. 6-18
Original Type*
P. 6-18
Lighten/Darken*
Adjusts the copy density.
P. 6-19
Original Size*
P. 6-20
Send Priority
Prioritizes the transmission of a fax when other faxes are pending.
P. 6-21
Polling
Used to send a command to a remote machine to receive a

document saved on it.
P. 6-21
2 Sided
Sets whether the document is one- or two-sided.
P. 6-22
Edge Erase*
Sets the value for the Edge Erase function used to eliminate
shadows.
P. 6-23
ECM*
Resends pages for which transmission failed due to transmission

errors or other problems.
P. 6-23
Off Hook
Used to set whether or not to detect an off-the-hook receiver

when an external phone is installed.
P. 6-24
Delayed Fax*
Used to send a fax at a specified time, or for Remote Polling.
P. 6-25
Note * You can change the default value of the functions.

For more information on changing the default settings, refer to Default Settings on page 9-8.
1.

Fax button

User Guide
6-17
Fax
2.
Example: The recipient being specified on the shown screen.
Resolution
1. Select Resolution, and then press the OK button.
2.
Select the resolution, and then press the OK button.
Resolution
Standard
Fine
Superfine
Standard
The standard mode. The machine scans at a resolution of 200 100 dpi.
Fine
High picture quality mode. The machine scans at a resolution of 200 200 dpi.
Superfine
Ultra-high picture quality mode. The machine scans at a resolution of 400 400 dpi.
Original Type
You can set the type of document to optimize scans.
1. Select Original Type, and then press the OK button.
6-18

User Guide
Fax
2.
Select the document type, and then press the OK button.
Original Type
Text
Photo & Text
Photo
Text (default)
Select this item when document contains sharp black and white objects such as text.
Photo & Text
Select this item when document contains both text and photos.
Photo
Select this item when document contains only photos.
Lighten/Darken
You can set the density from five levels. The farther left the position of
farther right, the lighter.
1. Select Lighten/Darken, and then press the OK button.
, the darker the copy; the

Resolution...
Original Type...
Lighten/Darken...
Standard
Text
Normal
2.
buttons to adjust the density, and then click the OK button.
Use the
and
Lighten/Darken
Darken
Normal
Lighten
Lighten/Darken...
Darken +2
Creates copies with the darkest density. Use this setting to scan document containing
light objects.
Darken +1
Creates copies with a fairly dark density. Use this setting to scan document
containing fairly light objects.
Normal
Creates copies with the same density as document.
Lighten +1
Creates copies with a fairly light density. Use this setting to scan document
containing fairly dark objects.
Lighten +2
Creates copies with the lightest density. Use this setting to scan document containing
dark objects.

User Guide
6-19
Fax
Original Size
Sets the size of document for fax transmission. The transmission size is automatically specified by the
document size.
1. Select Original Size, and then press the OK button.

Original Type...
Lighten/Darken...
Original Size...
2.
Text
Normal
Auto
Original Size
Auto
A3 (297x420mm)
A4 (210x297mm)
Auto
If document is a standard size, the machine detects the document size automatically. The paper size
used for sending the fax is determined by the detected document size.
Document Size
Size placed on the document glass
Size placed in the document feeder
A5 , B5 , B5 , A4 , A4 , 5.5 8.5"
, 8.5 11" , 8.5 11" , 16K , 16K
A5 , B5 , B5 , A4 , A4
8.5" , 8.5 11" , 8.5 11"
16K
B4
B4
A3
, 11 17"
, 8K
A3
, 5.5
, 16K ,
Paper Size
Fax is Sent As
A4
B4
, 11 17"
, 8K
A3
Notes
The document size selection screen appears if the machine cannot detect the size of a document
placed on the document glass. Select the desired document size. Depending on the selected
document size, the printout may be too large for the paper or may have shadows at the edges.
The document feeder does not support the non-standard document sizes.
Fixed document size (Preset)
You can set the document size of the placed document by selecting from the preset document sizes.
6-20

User Guide
Fax
Send Priority
Used to prioritize the transmission of a fax, to have it supersede any other faxes that may be pending.
Only one job can be selected for Send Priority.
Notes
Faxes, including priority faxes, that fail due to transmission errors will not be resent. However, faxes
that fail during transmission or while the recipient's line is busy will be resent. In this case, if a
pending document comes up that is ready to be sent before resending of failed faxes begins, the
failed fax is resent after the pending document that is ready is sent.
When a current or pending priority fax fails due to a transmission or similar error, you cannot set
another priority fax until all of the documents for which Send Priority was set have been sent.
Priority faxes can't be fax broadcasts (faxes sent to multiple recipients at once).
1. Select Send Priority, and then press the OK button.

Lighten/Darken...
Original Size...
Send Priority...
2.
Normal
Auto
Off
Select On, and then press the OK button.
Send Priority
Off
On
Note Select Off to disable the priority fax setting.
Polling
Used to issue a command to a remote machine to send a stored document.
Notes
Only one job can be selected for Polling.
The Polling function may not be supported by some remote fax machines.
The cost of the call will be charged to the machine.
Only one recipient can be specified for single remote polling.
It redials if the other party does not respond.
1. Select Polling, and then click the OK button.

Original Size...
Send Priority...
Polling...
Auto
Off
Off

User Guide
6-21
Fax
2.
Polling
Off
On
Note Select Off to disable the Polling function.
3.
Select Recipient, and specify the recipient's fax number.

Recipient...
Polling...
Delayed Fax...
Standard
Off
For information on how to specify a recipient, refer to Specifying the Recipient on page 6-5.
4.

ECN...
Off Hook...
Delayed Fax...
On
Off
Off
To receive a polling file at a specified time, select Delayed Fax, and set the time at which to
receive the polling.
For information on how to schedule the time at which to receive a fax, refer to Delayed Fax on
page 6-25.
2 Sided
You can set to scan a 1 Sided or 2 Sided.
Note This function is available when the document feeder and the Duplex Output Unit are installed on
the machine.
1.
Select 2 Sided, and then press the OK button.

Send Priority...
Polling...
2 Sided...
6-22
Off
Off
Off

User Guide
Fax
2.
Select the copy method, and then press the OK button.
2 Sided
Off
On
Off
Select Off for a one-sided document.
On
Select On for a two-sided document.
Edge Erase
You can set to erase the black shadows created around the edge of the paper when scanning a fax with
the document cover open or copying a bound document.
You can set a value between 0 and 10 mm (in 1 mm increments) for the Edge Erase function.
Note The value set for Edge Erase applies to all four edges of the document.
1.
Select Edge Erase, and then press the OK button.

Polling...
2 Sided...
Edge Erase...
2.
Off
Off
2 mm
Use the numeric keypad to enter a value, and then press the OK button.
Edge Erase
[0 - 10]
2 OO
ECM
Used to resend pages for which transmission failed due to transmission errors or other problems.
1. Select ECM, and then press the OK button.

2 Sided...
Edge Erase...
ECM...
Off
2mm
On

User Guide
6-23
Fax
2.
ECM
Off
On
Note Select Off to disable this function.
Off Hook
You can select this function when sending a fax during a voice call while an external phone is
connected. Setting this to On allows you to send and receive faxes while the manual fax transmission
screen is displayed.
For information on how to send or receive a fax manually, refer to Sending/Receiving Faxes Manually
on page 6-26.
1. Select Off Hook, and then press the OK button.

Edge Erase...
ECM...
Off Hook...
2.
2mm
On
Off
Off Hook
Off
On
6-24

User Guide
Fax
Delayed Fax
Used to send a document stored in the machine at a specified time, or issue a command to a remote
machine to send a stored document at a specified time (Delayed Polling). The number of documents
that can be set up simultaneously is 3 for delayed transmission and 1 for Delayed Polling.
Notes
You can specify a time between 00:00 and 23:59 (or between 1:00 and 12:59 AM/PM when the
12-hour clock has been set).
You cannot specify a date.
When there is a document set with the time specified for the delayed fax while the machine is off,
the machine sends the document as the machine is turned on.
If you specify a time before the current time, the fax will be sent at the specified time the next
day.
If the specified time arrives while the document to fax is being scanned, transmission will start
about 2 minutes after scanning has finished.
1. Select Delayed Fax, and then press the OK button.

ECM...
Off Hook...
Delayed Fax...
2.
On
Off
Off
Delayed Fax
Off
On...
Note Select Off to disable this function.
3.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the time, and then press the OK button.
Delayed Fax
(0:00 - 23:59)
00 : 00

User Guide
6-25
Fax
Sending/Receiving Faxes Manually

When an external phone is connected, you can switch the machine directly from a voice call to a fax
send or receive operation.
Follow the steps below to perform the operation.
1. Lift the receiver and make a call.
2. The call is connected when the receiver picks up.
Note The manual fax transmission screen is cleared and the display returns to the default display
screen if the communications time is too long. For information on how to retransmit faxes
manually, refer to Off Hook on page 6-24.
3.
You can now send or receive a fax to or from the number you called.
To send a fax
1. Place document in the machine.
For information on how to place a document, refer to Placing a Document on page 6-1.
2.
Select Send (Manual), and then press the OK button.
Fax:Off Hook
SendManual...
ReceiveManual
3.

Note Only the items that can be set for manual fax transmission appear.
For more information on setting items, refer to Advanced Fax Settings on page 6-17.
4.

Start button
Note The machine starts to scan the document. It scans and then sends each page repeatedly.
To receive a fax
1. Wait until you hear the sender's fax machine on the phone's receiver.
6-26

User Guide
Fax
2.
Select Receive (Manual).
Fax:OffHook
SendManual...
ReceiveManual
3.

Start button
Receive the document.

4.
Replace the receiver to end the call.

User Guide
6-27
Fax
Receipt of Faxes
Received faxes can be printed on paper with the paper type of Plain 1, sized B5 , 8.5 11" , 8.5 11"
, A4 , B4 , or A3 using one-sided printing only.
You can restrict the paper size on which incoming faxes are received. For more information, refer to
Receive Size on page 9-37.
The paper type for the received fax is always set to Plain 1, regardless of the paper type setting
specified for each tray.
6-28

User Guide
Fax
Sending a Fax Directly from your Computer

This section describes how to send a fax directly from your computer.
After the installation of the print driver, you can directly send the document created on your computer
using an application in the same way as you print from your computer. This function is called Direct
Fax.
For information on how to install the print driver, refer to Installing the Print Driver/Scan Driver on
page 2-37.
Notes
For information on the Direct Fax function, click Help in the print driver screen to display Help
Information.
In order to use this function, setting the FAX feature to the print driver is required.
For information on how to set the option information, refer to Setting the Options Configuration on
page 3-26.
Sending a Direct Fax

This section describes how to fax a document directly from your computer.
The procedure used for Direct Fax will vary according to the application you are using. See your
application's manual for the specific procedure.
The steps below are the operation used in the WorkCentre 5022/5024 print driver screen.
Note You can send a fax up to 250 pages in one transmission. If it exceeds the 250 pages, send it as a
separate file.
1.
2.
Select Print from the application's File menu.

Select WorkCentre XXXXX.
XXXXX: Displayed as either "5022" or "5024," depending on the model of your machine.
3.
Click Properties, and then select Fax from the Job Type.

User Guide
6-29
Fax
4.
Click the Fax tab, and then select the desired setting if needed.
Note For information on the Direct Fax functions, click Help in the print driver screen to display
Help Information.
5.
6.
7.
Click OK.
Click OK in the Print dialog box.
Specify a recipient.
Note For information on specifying a recipient, click \Help on the Recipient Setting screen to
display Help Information. Also, you can select the recipient registered in the Address Book Editor.
For information on the installation of Address Book Editor, refer to Installing the Scan Driver on
page 2-37.
8.
6-30
Click Start Sending.

User Guide
Scan
Scanning Procedure
The basic flow of scan operations, including placing the document in the machine and setting advance
settings, is detailed below.
Placing the Document

The following two methods are available to load documents.
Document feeder
Single sheet
Multiple sheets
Document glass
Single sheet
Bound documents, such as books
Document Feeder
You can place documents of the standard sizes in the document feeder.
A4 , B5 , B5 *, A5 , 11 17" , 8.5 14" *, 8.5 13" *, 8.5 11" , 8.5 11" , 8K ,
16K , and 16K *.
Notes
B5
(default) or 16K
8.5 14"
(default) or 8.5 13"
When a document containing pages of different sizes is placed in the machine, the machine uses
the largest document size to scan the document.
When using 2-sided document placed in the document feeder, make sure to set 2 Sided properly.
If it is not specified and the scanned orientation needs to be corrected, rotate it on your computer.

User Guide
7-1
Scan
Selectable document sizes in the scan driver

A3 (297 420 mm), A4 (210 297 mm), A5 (148 210 mm), B4 (257 364 mm), B5 (182 257 mm),
8.5 11", 8.5 14", 11 17", 7.25 10.5", and Custom.
Documents with weights from 38 to 128 gsm (50 to 128 gsm for 2 Sided documents) can be placed in
Document type (gsm)
Number of sheets
110 sheets
110 sheets
75 sheets
the document.
Follow the steps below to place the document on the document feeder.
You can place single or multiple sheet documents.
1. Remove any paper clips or staples from the document before placing it in the document feeder.
2. Place the document in the center of the document feeder, with the side to scan (or the front
surface of a 2 Sided document) facing up.
3.
7-2
Align the document guides to each side of the document.

User Guide
Scan
4.
Document Glass
, 11 17" , 8.5 11" , 8K , 16K , and 16K .
, B4
, A4
, A4
, B5
, B5
, A5
*, 8.5 11"

You can select one of the following document sizes from Original Size.
A3 , B4 , A4 , A4 , B5 , B5
8.5 11" , 8K , and 16K .
, A5
, 11 17"
, 8.5 14"
*, 8.5 13"
Note When Original Size is set to Auto, an error screen appears when you place a non-standard size
document on the document glass. In this case, select a document size manually by selecting Original
Size from the menu items. Depending on the selected document size, the printout may be too large for
the paper or may have shadows at the edges.
Selectable document sizes in the scan driver
A3 (297 420 mm), A4 (210 297 mm), A5 (148 210 mm), B4 (257 364 mm), B5 (182 257 mm),
8.5 11", 8.5 14", 11 17", 7.25 10.5", and Custom.
CAUTION: Do not apply excessive force to hold thick document on the document glass. It may
break the glass and cause injuries.

User Guide
7-3
Scan
Follow the steps below to place a single sheet document, or bound document such as book, on the
document glass.
Note When using the document glass, make sure to close the document cover after finishing your scan
job.
2.
Place the document face down, and align it against the top left corner of the document glass.
3.
7-4

User Guide
Scan
Using the Scan Feature

You can select the scan functions from the following list.
Scan Function
Connection
Details
See Page
Using an application
USB
Scan data is loaded into the computer using

the TWAIN or Windows Imaging Acquisition
(WIA)-compatible application.
P. 7-6
E-mail
Network
Scan data is sent to the computer as an e-mail

attachment.
P. 7-7
Scan data is forwarded to a computer over the

network.
P. 7-10
PC (Network)
Notes
Some functions are not available on certain models. For more information, contact our Customer
Support Center.
The file name of the scanned data is displayed in the format YYMMDDHHMMSS.extension.
Here, YY = Year (4 digits), MM = Month (2 digits), DD = Day (2 digits), HH = Hour (2 digits), MM =
Minutes (2 digits), and SS = Seconds (2 digits).
The size of the scanned image may be slightly larger than the document size in some cases. This is
due to the margin of error introduced with processing.

User Guide
7-5
Scan
Using an Application to Load Scan Data from

the Machine via USB
This function allows you to load scan data from a TWAIN-compatible or Windows Imaging Acquisition
(WIA)-compatible application installed on a computer. On the computer display, you can set the
scanning condition and view the scanning process on the preview screen while scanning the document.
Notes
Install the scan driver to use this function. For information on how to install the scan driver, refer
to Installing the Scan Driver on page 2-37.
The items you can set will vary according to the TWAIN-compatible and Windows Imaging
Acquisition (WIA)-compatible applications you are using.
The supported applications are 32-bit only.
1. Place the document.
Refer to Placing the Document on page 7-1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Start an application to load the scanned data.

Select the menu item for selecting a scanner (source).
Select WorkCentre 5022/5024.
Note For information on the scan functions, click Help in the screen to display the help information.
6.
7-6
Click Scan.

User Guide
Scan
Sending Scan Data to PC as E-mail Attachment E-mail

This function allows you to send scanned data via e-mail. You can send the monochrome scanned data
in PDF or TIFF or the color scanned data in PDF or JPEG to an e-mail. The SMTP protocol is used for the
e-mail transmission.
You can only select an e-mail address from the Address Book. You must register e-mail addresses using
Xerox CentreWare Internet Services in advance. Up to 30 e-mail addresses and SMB servers in total
can be registered.
For more information on Xerox CentreWare Internet Services, refer to Using Xerox CentreWare
Internet Services on page 2-17.
Notes
Up to 20 MB of data can be sent.
If there are any errors during the transmission, an error report is sent to the System
Administrator's e-mail address after the transmission to the SMTP server is completed.
When using 2-sided document placed in the document feeder, make sure to set 2 Sided properly.
If it is not specified and the orientation of the scanned data needs to be changed, rotate it on
your computer.
For more information on selecting TIFF or JPEG format, refer to File Format on page 7-20.
Follow the steps below to e-mail the scanned data.
For information on how to place a document, refer to Placing the Document on page 7-1.
2.
Press the Scan button.

Scan button
Note In the displayed screen, you can enter a two-digit number of registered recipient using the
numeric keypad, and then go to step 5.
200
Scan to [ ]
Color Mode...
File Format...
Original Size...
Color
PDF
A4

User Guide
7-7
Scan
3.

Address Book button
4.
Select the desired recipient, and then press the OK button.
E-mail
[#]:Info Jump to [_ ]
01 pc1
02 Smith
03 pc2
5.
Notes
You can also enter a two-digit number of registered recipient to jump to the specified
recipient.
To check the e-mail address registered for a recipient, select the recipient and press the #
button. When you have checked the address, press the OK button.
200
Scan to [02]
Color Mode...
File Format...
Original Size...
Color
PDF
A4
For more information on advanced settings, refer to Advanced Scanner Settings on page 7-15.
7-8

User Guide
Scan
6.

Start button
If the recipient is not specified, the Address Book screen is displayed.

Note You can also set to display the screen to confirm recipient. For more information, refer to
Recipient Confirmation on page 9-33.
Confirm Recipient
02 Smith
Smith@xxx.com
E-mail

User Guide
7-9
Scan
Sending Scan Data to PC over Network - PC

(Network)
This function allows you to send scanned data to a network-based computer. You can send the
monochrome scanned data in PDF or TIFF or the color scanned data in PDF or JPEG to the specified
computer. The SMB protocol is used for the data transmission.
You can only select a forwarding computer from the Address Book. You must register computer
addresses using Xerox CentreWare Internet Services in advance. Up to 30 e-mail addresses and
SMB servers in total can be registered.
For more information on Xerox CentreWare Internet Services, refer to Using Xerox CentreWare
Internet Services on page 2-17.
Notes
To forward scan data, you must first create a shared folder in which to save the data on the
computer. Set the write permission for the shared folder.
If you forward a data file having the same name as a file already in the shared folder, the new file
will replace the old one.
Up to 20 MB of data can be scanned to PC (Network). If the volume exceeds 20 MB, you can
select whether to cancel or send the part. (Scan data volume may differ depending on the
graphical content in the original document, color mode, and resolution.)
If a network error occurred or the machine or the computer is disconnected during the
transmission, a part of the transferred file is stored in the computer. To delete this file, delete it
manually.
When using a 2-sided document placed in the document feeder, make sure to set 2 Sided
properly. If it is not specified and the orientation of the scanned data needs to be changed, rotate
it on your computer.
For more information on selecting TIFF or JPEG format, refer to File Format on page 7-20.
To forward scanned data to a network computer:
For information on how to place a document, refer to Placing the Document on page 7-1.
7-10

User Guide
Scan
2.
Press the Scan button.

Scan button
Note In the displayed screen, you can enter the two-digit number of registered computer using
the numeric keypad, and then go to step 5.
3.

Address Book button
4.
Select the desired address of computer, and then press the OK button.
PC(Network) [#]:Info Jump to [_ ]

01 pc1
02 Smith
03 pc2
5.
Notes
You can also enter the two-digit number of registered computer to jump to the specified
computer.
To check the address registered for a computer, select it and press the # button. When you
have checked the address, press the OK button.
200
Scan to [01]
Color Mode...
File Format...
Original Size...
Color
PDF
A4
For more information on advanced settings, refer to Advanced Scanner Settings on page 7-15.

User Guide
7-11
Scan
6.

Start button
If the address of computer is not specified, the Address Book screen appears.
Note You can also set to display the screen to confirm recipient. For more information, refer to
Recipient Confirmation on page 9-33.
7-12

User Guide
Scan
Operations During Scanning

While the machine is scanning document, you can cancel the currently executing job, and check or
cancel the pending jobs.
Canceling the Current Scan Job

To cancel the current scanning job:
On the machine
Stop button
On the computer
1. Press Cancel on the screen displayed while scanning.
Checking Job Status

To check the status of the currently executing or the previously scanned job:
Note You can cancel the currently executing scan job.
For more information on operation in job screen, refer to Canceling the Current Job on page 11-3.
Job Status button

User Guide
7-13
Scan
2.
Active Jobs
[Stop]:Delete
Fax (Print)
Print
Print
A4
A4
B5
3.
7-14
To exit the screen, press the OK button.

User Guide
Scan
Advanced Scanner Settings

This section describes the advanced functions available for Scan feature with E-mail or PC (Network).
Setting Item
Description
See Page
Lighten/Darken*
Adjusts the scan density.
P. 7-16
Original Type*
P. 7-17
2 Sided
Sets whether the document is one- or two-sided.
P. 7-18
Resolution*
P. 7-19
Color Mode*
Sets the color mode.
P. 7-20
File Format*
Sets the file format.
P. 7-20
Original Size*
P. 7-21
Note * You can change the default value of the functions.

For more information on defaults that can be changed, and how to change them, refer to Default
1. Press the Scan button.
Scan button
2.
After specifying a recipient or the address of computer, make advanced settings as needed.
200
Scan to [01]
Color Mode...
File Format...
Original Size...
Color
PDF
A4
For information on specifying an e-mail recipient, refer to Sending Scan Data to PC as E-mail
Attachment - E-mail on page 7-7.
For information on specifying an address of computer, refer to Sending Scan Data to PC over
Network - PC (Network) on page 7-10.

User Guide
7-15
Scan
Lighten/Darken
You can set the density from the five levels. The farther left the position of
density is; the farther right, the lighter.
1. Press the Lighten/Darken button.
, the darker the copy
2.
The selection of the brightness level changes everytime the Lighten/Darken button is pressed.
The selection is applied when the screen is returned to the main menu screen without pressing the
OK button.
Lighten/Darken
Darken
Normal
Lighten
Lighten/Darken...
7-16
Darken +2
Scans with the darkest density. Use this setting to scan document containing light
objects.
Darken +1
Scans with a fairly dark density. Use this setting to scan document containing fairly
light objects.
Normal
Scans with the same density as document.
Lighten +1
Scans with a fairly light density. Use this setting to scan document containing fairly
dark objects.
Lighten +2
Scans with the lightest density. Use this setting to scan document containing dark
objects.

User Guide
Scan
Original Type
You can set the type of document to optimize the scan data.
Note When Color Mode is set to Color, the image quality of Text and Photo are equivalent to that of
Photo & Text.
1.
Press the Original Type button.

2.
The selection of a document type changes everytime the Original Type button is pressed. The
button.
Scan to [01]
200
Text
Photo & Text
Photo
Text (default)
Select this item when document contains sharp black and white objects such as text.
Photo & Text
Select this item when document contains both text and photos.
Photo
Select this item when document contains only photos.

User Guide
7-17
Scan
2 Sided
You can set to scan a 1 Sided or 2 Sided document.
Note This feature is available when the document feeder is installed on the machine.
1.
Press the 2 Sided button.

2 Sided button
2.
The selection of a copy method changes everytime the 2 Sided button is pressed. The selection is
applied when the screen is returned to the main menu screen without pressing the OK button.
Scan to [01]
200
Off
Flip on Long Edge
Flip on Short Edge
7-18
Off
Select Off for a one-sided document.
Flip on Long Edge
Scans document in portrait orientation to be turned side-to-side.
Flip on Short Edge
Scans document in landscape orientation to be turned side-to-side.

User Guide
Scan
Resolution
Sets the scan resolution. You can select 200 200 dpi, 300 300 dpi, 400 400 dpi or 600 600 dpi.
Notes
When Resolution is set to 400 400 dpi or 600 600 dpi in Black & White mode, changing the
color mode to Color mode changes the Resolution setting to 300 x 300 dpi.
When Color Mode is set to Color, changing the resolution to 400x400 dpi or 600x600 dpi
changes the Color Mode setting to Black & White.
1. Press the Collated/Resolution button.
2.
The selection of a resolution changes everytime the Collated/Resolution button is pressed. The
button.
Scan to [01]
200
200 x 200 dpi

300 x 300 dpi
400 x 400 dpi

User Guide
7-19
Scan
Color Mode
Sets the color mode.
Notes
When Resolution is set to 400 400 dpi or 600 600 dpi in Black & White mode, changing the
color mode to Color mode changes the Resolution setting to 300 x 300 dpi.
When File Format is set to TIFF in Black & White mode, changing the color mode to Color
changes the File Format setting to PDF.
When File Format is set to JPEG in Color mode, changing the color mode to Black & White
changes the File Format setting to PDF.
1. Select Color Mode, and then press the OK button.
200
Scan to [01]
Color Mode...
File Format...
Original Size...
2.
Color
PDF
A4
Select the desired color mode, and then press the OK button.
Color Mode
Black & White
Color
Black & White
Used to scan document in black-and-white. The scan data is converted to PDF or TIFF
format.
Color
Used to scan document in color. The scan data is converted to PDF or JPEG format.
File Format
Sets the file format of the scanned data.
The file name is saved in the form of "YYMMDDHHMMSS".
1. Select File Format, and then press the OK button.
200
Scan to [01]
Color Mode...
File Format...
Original Size...
7-20
Color
PDF
A4

User Guide
Scan
2.
Select the desired file format, and then press the OK button.
File Format
PDF
TIFF
JPEG
PDF (default)
Supports both Black & White and Color.
TIFF
Selectable when Black & White is selected in Color Mode.
JPEG
Selectable when Color is selected in Color Mode.
Original Size
You can set the document size and orientation.
1. Select Original Size then press the OK button.
200
Scan to [01]
Color Mode...
File Format...
Original Size...
2.
Color
PDF
A4
Original Size
A4 (210x297mm)
B4 (257x364mm)
B5 (182x257mm)
Auto
The machine automatically detects the document size from the supported
standard sizes.
Fixed document size

(Preset)
Select the size of the placed document.
Note Original Size is automatically set to Auto when document is placed in the document feeder.

User Guide
7-21
Scan
7-22

User Guide
Print
Major Print Driver Functions
This section describes the major print driver functions used for printing. The print driver must be
installed before use.
For information on how to install the print driver, refer to Installing the Print Driver/Scan Driver on
page 2-37.
Notes
For information on the Print functions, click Help in the print driver screen to display the help
information.
Some functions displayed in the Options tab of the Properties screen can only be used when the
mounted options information has been set into the print driver. Functions that have been disabled
do not display.
For information on how to set the option information, refer to Setting the Options Configuration
on page 3-26.
Function
Description
Multiple-Up
Prints a multiple-page document on a single page.
2 Sided Print
Prints on both sides of each page when the duplex output unit is installed.
Poster
Enlarges one page of print data to the specified size and prints it on multiple pages.
Used to create large posters.
Booklet
Combines 2-sided printing with page collation to enable the creation of booklets
with the correct page sequence.
Watermarks
Prints 'Confidential' or another preset character string on top of print data.
Mixed Document
Prints documents containing both vertical and horizontal pages, or pages of

different sizes.

User Guide
8-1
Print
Printing
The procedure used to print varies according to the application you are using. See your application's
manual for the specific procedure.
The steps below are used in the Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 print driver screen.
1. Select Print from the application's File menu.
2. Select Xerox WorkCentre XXXXX.
Note XXXXX is displayed as either "5022" or "5024," depending on the model of your machine.
3.
If needed, select Properties to make advanced settings.
Note For information on the Print functions, select Help in the print driver screen to display the help
information.
4.
5.
8-2
Click OK.
Click OK in the Print dialog box.

User Guide
Print
Operations During Printing

Stopping the Print Job
To cancel the currently printing job:
On the machine
Press the Stop button.
Stop button
On the computer
1.
Double-click the printer icon
located on the task bar in the lower right corner of the screen.
2.
Select the document name that you desired to cancel, and then press the Delete key.
If there is no document within the window, cancel it manually on the machine.

User Guide
8-3
Print
8-4

User Guide
Tools
Each machine feature is set to factory default (initial) settings, but you can customize these settings to
match your operating environment. You can change these settings in the Tools screen in System
Note Some settings cannot be displayed on certain models. An optional component is required. For
more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
This chapter describes the functions you can change settings for and provides the settings procedures.
System Settings Procedure

This section gives an overview of how to change the machine's default settings and check machine
information.
Notes
If there are any current or pending jobs you cannot enter System Administration mode. If there
are no current or pending jobs and you still cannot enter System Administration mode, there may
be a background process running. Wait 5 minutes and try again.
While in System Administration mode you cannot receive a print job or start a print or scan job.
Entering System Administration Mode

1.
Log In/Out button

User Guide
9-1
Tools

Notes
The passcode is initially set to "1111" (four "1" digits).
The passcode can be changed.
For information on how to change the passcode, refer to System Administrator Passcode on
page 9-51.

[
2.
Use the numeric keypad to enter the password, and then press the OK button.

[* * * * * ]
Note The Log In/Out button lights up when the machine enters System Administration mode.
Changing the Settings

1.
Press the
and
buttons to select the item to set.
For more information, refer to List of Tools Menu Items Displayed in System Administration Mode
on page 9-4.
Tools
Default Settings...
Device Information...
Tray Settings...
2.

Note To return to the Tools screen, press the Clear All button. To return to the previous screen,
press the Back or s button.
3.
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 as needed to set all the desired functions.

Note Some setting items require input of numerical values using the numeric keypad.
9-2

User Guide
Tools
Exiting System Administration Mode

1.
Press the Log In/Out button.

Log In/Out button
Notes
If any settings that require to reboot the machine for the new settings to be applied, reboot
the machine as the message appear.
The Log In/Out button light goes off when the machine exits System Administration mode.

User Guide
9-3
Tools
List of Tools Menu Items Displayed in System

Administration Mode
The table below lists the default settings you can change. The items displayed will vary according to
your machine's configuration.
Item
Description
See Page
Default Settings
Used to set the default values of the setting items shown on

the control panel display.
P. 9-8
Copy
Used to set the default values of the setting items in the

Copy screen.
P. 9-8
ID Card Copy
Used to set the default values of the setting items in the ID

Card Copy screen.
P. 9-10
Scan
Used to set the default values of the setting items in the

Scan screen.
P. 9-10
Fax
Used to set the default values of the setting items in the Fax
screen.
P. 9-12
Device Information
Used to check the Product Name, Serial Number, Printer

Name, System Admin. E-mail Address, Firmware Version,
IPv4, and IPv6 settings.
P. 9-15
Tray Settings
Used to set the paper type (paper quality) in the paper

trays. Also used to set the paper size for Paper Tray 5.
P. 9-16
Custom Paper Size Settings
Used to set non-standard paper sizes for Customs (1 to 5)

for Tray 5 (bypass).
P. 9-18
Control Panel Language
Used to set the user interface language used in the control

panel display.
P. 9-19
Default Display
Used to set the initial screen to appear in the control panel

at power on.
P. 9-20
Phone Book
Used to creates a Phone Book for the fax transmission

function.
P. 9-21
Speed Dial
Used to register and change names and fax numbers.
P. 9-21
Group
Used to register or change groups for the Speed Dial

function.
P. 9-24
Wired Network
Used to make network environment settings.
P. 9-27
Ethernet
Used to set the Ethernet environment to use.
P. 9-27
TCP/IP
Used to set TCP/IP.
P. 9-27
IP Filter
Used to restrict the IP addresses that can access the

machine.
P. 9-29
9-4

User Guide
Tools
Item
Description
See Page
Copy Settings
Used to make Copy feature settings.
P. 9-30
Sharpness
Used to set the sharpness level.
P. 9-30
Used to set whether to remove the background of an image.
P. 9-30
Back. Suppression Level
Used to set the background suppression level.
P. 9-30
Reduce/Enlarge Preset
Used to set the preset reduction/enlargement setting.
P. 9-30
Auto Collate
Used to set to rotate when Collated is selected for output

method
P. 9-31
Used to make Scan feature settings.
P. 9-32
Used to set whether to remove the background of an image.
P. 9-30
Used to set the background suppression level.
P. 9-30
Used to set the preset reduction/enlargement setting.
P. 9-30
Image Compression
Used to set the compression ratio for scanning.
P. 9-32
Sharpness
Used to set the sharpness level.
P. 9-32
Edge Erase
Used to set the value of Edge Erase.
P. 9-33
Maximum Attachment Size
Used to set the maximum file size of an attached file.
P. 9-33
Receipt Confirmation
Used to set whether to confirm recipient information before

sending.
P. 9-33
Used to make Fax function settings.
P. 9-34
Mode
Used to set the method used to receive faxes when an

external phone is mounted.
P. 9-34
Fax Answer
Used to set the ring time when an external phone is

mounted.(When Mode is set to Fax)
P. 9-34
Tel/Fax Answer
Used to set the ring time when an external phone is

mounted.(When Mode is set to Tel/Fax)
P. 9-34
Line Volume
Used to set the volume of the speaker used to output sound

from the phone line.
P. 9-35
Line Type
Used to set the line type.
P. 9-35
Dial Type
Used to set the dial type.
P. 9-35
Call Interval
Used to set the amount of time the machine waits between

the end of one transmission and the start of the next.
P. 9-35
Redial Attempts
Used to set the number of times the machine redials.
P. 9-36
Redial Interval
Used to set the amount of time the machine waits between

redials.
P. 9-36
Junk Filter
Used to block junk faxes.
P. 9-36
Scan Settings
Fax Settings

User Guide
9-5
Tools
Item
Description
See Page
Send Header
Used to set whether to send information including the print

date and sender information on outgoing faxes or not.
P. 9-36
Company Name
Used to register the sender name.
P. 9-36
Fax Number
Used to register the machine's fax number.
P. 9-36
Forward
Used to set whether to forward the incoming fax or not.
P. 9-36
Auto Reduce On Receipt
Used to set whether to reduce the image size when the

incoming data is too large for the output paper.
P. 9-37
Border Limit
Used to set the image size limit at which to split the page
when the incoming data is too large for the output paper.
P. 9-37
Receive Size
Used to restrict the paper size of faxes that can be received.
P. 9-37
Print Size (Received Letter)
Used to set whether to print the incoming Letter size data

on Letter paper or A4 paper.
P. 9-38
Immediate Fax Switch
Used to set the remaining memory level at which to move

to immediate communications during fax transmission.
P. 9-38
Off Hook Level
Used to set the detection level of an off-the-hook receiver

when using an external phone.
P. 9-38
Region
Used to set the region name.
P. 9-38
Activity Report
Used to set whether to automatically print out the results of

sent and received documents that are stored in memory.
P. 9-39
Transmission Report
Used to set the method used to print fax transmission

results.
P. 9-40
Broadcast Report
Used to set the method of printing transmission results

when "broadcasting" (sending the same fax to multiple
recipients at once).
P. 9-40
Protocol Report
Used to set the method used to print protocols.
P. 9-41
Used to set other functions.
P. 9-42
Power Saver Timer
Used to set the amount of time the machine waits before

entering its power-saving modes.
P. 9-42
Auto Reset

resetting the screen while an operation is being performed.
P. 9-42
Auto Print

starting to print and after receiving a print job.
P. 9-42
Idle Timeout

documents are added.
P. 9-43
Job Cancel
Used to set whether to automatically cancel the job when a

job error occurs.
P. 9-43
Clock
Used to set the time on the machine's system clock.
P. 9-43
System Settings
9-6

User Guide
Tools
Item
Description
See Page
Audio Tones
Used to set the volume of the machine's audio tones.
P. 9-46
Job History Verbose
Used to set whether to have the machine automatically

print Job History Reports or not.
P. 9-48
Auto Paper Selection
Used to set the paper tray for the paper size detected
automatically.
P. 9-48
User Control
Used to restrict the use of the Copy functions.
P. 9-48
Paper Size Settings
Used to set the group of standard document/paper sizes to

be detected.
P. 9-49
Show Toner Alert
Used to set how frequently to display messages when the

toner cartridge needs to be replaced.
P. 9-49
Show Drum Alert

drum cartridge needs to be replaced.
P. 9-49
Show Drum Warning

drum cartridge life is ended.
P. 9-49
Maintenance
Used to reset the counters of the periodic replacement parts

for machine maintenance.
P. 9-50
Used to set System Administrator information.
P. 9-51
Used to set the passcode needed to enter System

P. 9-51
Used to restrict the users permitted to use the Copy

functions.
P. 9-52
Confirm/Edit
Used to set whether to reset the total number of copied

impressions or not.
P. 9-52
Reset Copied Impressions
Used to set user passcodes and the maximum number of

impressions permitted for copying.
P. 9-54
Security Settings
User Management

User Guide
9-7
Tools
Default Settings
Use the Default Settings screen to make default settings for the Copy, Scan and Fax features.
For information on how to display the Default Settings screen, refer to System Settings Procedure on
page 9-1.
Copy
Sets the default advanced copy settings displayed when the control panel's Copy button is pressed.
Paper Supply
Sets the paper tray displayed in Paper Supply. Select the default paper tray to use for copying.
Auto is set at the time of factory shipment.
Tray 2, Tray 3, and Tray 4 are displayed when the optional paper trays are mounted.
The machine selects a paper tray whose tray is set to On for Auto Paper Selection to use for copying
when Auto is selected. If there is more than one paper tray available that satisfies the conditions, the
machine selects the tray with the highest priority to use for copying. However, those trays with the
setting of paper quality or paper size that does not support 2 Sided function are excluded from the
selection. The priority of the trays to use is Tray 1 > Tray 2 > Tray 3 > Tray 4 > Tray 5.
If an optional paper tray is set as default, the default setting returns to Auto if that tray is removed.
Reduce/Enlarge
Sets the default value displayed for Reduce/Enlarge.
You can select 100%, Auto, 50% A3A5, 70% A3A4, B4gB5, 81% B4A4, B5gA5, 86% A3B4,
A4gB5, 115% B4A3, B5A4, 122% A4B4, A5B5, 141% A4A3, B5B4, 200% A5A3, 5.5 x
8.5"11 x 17", or Preset XXX%.
Notes
The value displayed for Preset XXX% is the value registered for Reduce/Enlarge Preset in Copy
Settings.
When Auto is set, the machine reduces or enlarges the document to fit the specified paper size
when copying.
2 Sided
Set the default value displayed for 2 Sided.
9-8

User Guide
Tools
1 1 Sided is set at the time of factory shipment.

1 1 Sided
Set when copying one-sided document on one side of each output page.
1 2 Sided
Set when copying one-sided document on both sides of each output page.
2 1 Sided
Set when copying two-sided document on one side of each output page.
2 2 Sided
Set when copying two-sided document on both sides of each output page.
Original Type
Sets the default value displayed for Original Type. This setting optimizes the copy characteristics for
the specified document type.
Text is set at the time of factory shipment.
Text
Set when copying documents with sharp black and white contrast, such as text
documents.
Photo & Text
Set when copying documents containing both text and photos.
Photo
Set when copying photos.

Note: This item is disabled when Color Mode is set to Black & White and enabled
when Color Mode is set to Color.
Lighten/Darken
Sets the default copy density value displayed in Lighten/Darken.
You can select Darken +2, Darken +1, Normal, Lighten +1, Lighten +2, or Toner Saver.
Normal sets the copy density at about the same as the document; Darken +2 sets a higher density
than the document; Lighten +2 sets a lower density.
Toner Saver sets the following values for each feature to conserve the toner usage. Lighten/Darken:
Lighten +2, Sharpness: Sharpen +2, and Original Type: Photo& Text.
Normal is set at the time of factory shipment.
Edge Erase
Sets the default value displayed for Edge Erase. Setting a value for this menu item erases the black
shadows created around the edges of the paper when copying with the document cover open.
You can set values between 0 and 50 mm (in 1 mm increments).
2 mm is set at the time of factory shipment.

User Guide
9-9
Tools
ID Card Copy
Sets the default advanced ID Card Copy settings displayed when the control panels ID Card Copy
button is pressed.
Original Size
Sets the default value displayed for Original Size.
You can select values between 86 and 297 mm (in 1 mm increments).
Original Type
Sets the default value displayed for Original Type. This setting optimizes the copy characteristics for
the specified document type.
Text
Set when copying documents with sharp black and white contrast, such as a text
documents.
Photo & Text
Set when copying documents containing both text and photos.
Photo
Set when copying photos.
Edge Erase
shadows created around the edges of the paper when copying with the document cover open.
You can select values between 0 and 10 mm (in 1 mm increments).
Scan
Sets the default advanced scan settings displayed when the control panel's Scan button is pressed.
Color Mode
Sets the default color mode used for scanning (the item displayed for Color Mode).
Black & White is set at the time of factory shipment.
9-10

User Guide
Tools
Note When Resolution is set to 400 dpi or 600 dpi, selecting Color changes Resolution to 300 dpi.
Black & White
Scans document as black-and-white documents.
Color
Scans document as color documents.
File Format (B&W)

Sets the default file format used for scanning in monochrome.
PDF is set at the time of factory shipment.
PDF
Saves the scanned document in PDF file format.
TIFF
Saves the scanned document in TIFF file format.
File Format (Color)

Sets the default file format used for scanning in color.
PDF is set at the time of factory shipment.
PDF
Saves the scanned document in PDF file format.
JPEG
Saves the scanned document in JPEG file format.
Resolution
Sets the default scan resolution displayed for Resolution.
You can select 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, or 600 dpi.
200 dpi is set at the time of factory shipment.
Note When the Color Mode is set to Color, you can only select 200 dpi or 300 dpi.
Original Size
Sets the default value displayed for Original Size.
You can select Auto, A3 (297 x 420mm), A4 (297 x 210mm), A4 (210 x 297mm), B4 (257 x
364mm), B5 (257 x 182mm), B5 (182 x 257mm), 8K (270 x 390mm), 16K (270x 195mm),
16K (195 x 270mm), A5 (148 x 210mm), 11 x 17" , 8.5 x 14" , 8.5 x 13" , 8.5 x 11" , or 8.5
x 11" .
A4 (297 x 210mm) is set at the time of factory shipment.

User Guide
9-11
Tools
Original Type
Sets the default value displayed for Original Type. This setting optimizes the scanning characteristics
for the specified document type.
When Color Mode is set to Color, the image quality of Text and Photo are equivalent to that of Photo
& Text.
Text
Set when scanning documents with sharp black and white contrast, such as a text
documents.
Photo & Text
Set when scanning documents containing both text and photos.
Photo
Set when scanning photos.

Note: This item is disabled when Color Mode is set to Black & White and enabled
when Color Mode is set to Color.
Lighten/Darken
Sets the default scan density value displayed for Lighten/Darken.
You can select Darken +2, Darken +1, Normal, Lighten +1, or Lighten +2.
Normal sets the scan density at about the same as the document; Darken +2 sets a higher density
than the document; Lighten +2 sets a lower density.
Fax
Sets the default advanced fax settings displayed when the control panel's Fax button is pressed.
This menu item is not displayed when the Fax Kit is not mounted. When the Region item has not been
set in the Fax Settings, some items are not displayed. Set the Region item beforehand.
Resolution
Sets the default fax scan resolution displayed for Resolution.
Standard is set at the time of factory shipment.
Standard
Scans faxes at the resolution of 200 x 100 dpi (7.9 x 3.9 dots/mm).
Fine
Superfine
9-12

User Guide
Tools
Original Type
Sets the default value displayed for Original Type. This setting optimizes the fax scanning
characteristics to the specified document type.
Text
Set when faxing documents with sharp black and white contrast, such as a text
documents.
Photo & Text
Set when faxing documents containing both text and photos.
Photo
Set when faxing photos.
Lighten/Darken
Sets the default fax scanning resolution displayed for Lighten/Darken.
You can select Darken +2, Darken +1, Normal, Lighten +1, or Lighten +2.
Normal sets the fax scanning density at about the same as the document; Darken +2 sets a higher
density than the document; Lighten +2 sets a lower density.
Original Size
Set the default value displayed for Original Size.
You can select Auto, A3 (297 x 420mm), A4 (210 x 297mm), B4 (257 x 364mm), B5 (182 x
257mm), 8K (270 x 390mm), A5 (148 x 210mm), 11 x 17" , 8.5 x 14" , or 8.5 x 13" .
Original Size is set to Auto when a document is placed in the document feeder.
Edge Erase
Sets the default value displayed for Edge Erase. Setting a value for this setting erases the black
shadows created around the edges of paper when faxing with the document cover open.
ECM
Sets the default value displayed for ECM. This setting resends the fax if an error resulting in
transmission failure occurs.
You can select On or Off.

User Guide
9-13
Tools
On is set at the time of factory shipment.
Delayed Fax
Sets the default value displayed for Delayed Fax.
This setting lets you specify the time to send a fax. When 24-hour clock display has been set, you can
set any time between 0:00 and 23:59 (in 1 minute increments). When 12-hour clock display has been
set, you can set any time between 1:00 and 12:59 (in 1 minute increments).
The time is set to 21:00 at the time of factory shipment.
9-14

User Guide
Tools
Device Information
The Device Information screen displays the following items:
Item
Description
Product Name
The product's name.
Serial Number
The machine's serial number.
Printer Name
The printer's name.
System Admin. E-mail Address
The System Administrator's e-mail address.
Firmware Version
The machine's firmware version.
IPv4
Used to check the TCP/IP IPv4 settings.
IPv6
Used to check the TCP/IP IPv6 settings.
Follow the steps below to view Device Information screen information.

1. In the Device Information screen, select the item to display.
For information on how to display the Device Information screen, refer to System Settings
Procedure on page 9-1.
Device Information
Product Name...
Serial Number...
Printer Name...
2.

User Guide
9-15
Tools
Tray Settings
The Tray Settings set the paper type (paper quality) for each paper tray. The Tray Settings is also used
to set the paper size for Paper Tray 5 (bypass).
To maintain the same print quality after changing the quality of paper in a tray, change the tray's
default paper quality setting to match the new paper.
Tray 2 to Tray 4 are displayed when the optional paper trays are mounted.
For information on how to display the Tray Settings screen, refer to System Settings Procedure on
page 9-1.
Tray 1
Paper Type
Sets the type (quality) of the paper in Tray 1.
You can select Plain 1, Plain 2, or Lightweight.
Plain 1 is set at the time of factory shipment.
Tray 2 to Tray 4
Paper Type
Sets the type (quality) of the paper in Tray 2 to Tray 4 (optional trays).
You can select Plain 1, Plain 2, Heavyweight, Extra-HW, or Lightweight.
Tray 5
Paper Size
Sets the size of the paper in Tray 5 (bypass).
You can select A3 (297 x 420mm), A4 (297 x 210mm), A4 (210 x 297mm), B4 (257 x
364mm), B5 (257 x 182mm), B5 (182 x 257mm), 8K (270 x 390mm), 16K (270x 195mm),
16K (195 x 270mm), A5 (148 x 210mm), 11 x 17" , 8.5 x 14" , 8.5 x 13" , 8.5 x 11" , 8.5 x
11" , Custom 1 - Custom 5, or Custom Size.
If you select Custom Size and press the OK button, you can set a non-standard paper size (X
(horizontal) 98 to 432 mm, Y (vertical) 127 to 297 mm).
A4 (297 x 210mm) is set at the time of factory shipment.
9-16

User Guide
Tools
Paper Type
Sets the type (quality) of the paper in Tray 5 (bypass).
You can select Plain 1, Plain 2, Heavyweight, Extra-HW, or Lightweight.
Plain 1 is set at the time of factory shipment.

User Guide
9-17
Tools
Custom Paper Size Settings

You can set the non-standard paper sizes to the Customs (1 to 5) for the Tray 5 (bypass) (X (horizontal)
98 to 432 mm, Y (vertical) 127 to 297 mm).
The registered Customs can be selected in Original Size for the Copy feature.
9-18

User Guide
Tools
Control Panel Language

You can select from the following languages for the user interface language used in the control panel
display:
English
French
Italian
German
Spanish
Brazilian Portuguese
Russian
Greek
Turkish
Polish
Czech
Hungarian
Romanian
Note The default language may vary depending on the region of purchase.
Follow the steps below to select the language.
1. Select the language that you want to display from the Control Panel Language screen.
For information on how to display the Control Panel Language screen, refer to System Settings
Procedure on page 9-1.
2.

User Guide
9-19
Tools
Default Display
The Default Display screen lets you change the default display screen. The screen is displayed at
power on and after returning from Energy Saver mode. You can select the Copy screen, Fax screen, or
Scan screen as the default display screen.
Copy is set at the time of factory shipment.
Note Some screens cannot be set on some models.
Follow the steps below to change the default display screen.
1. In the Default Display screen, select the screen to use as the default display screen.
For information on how to display the Default Display screen, refer to System Settings Procedure
on page 9-1.
Default Display
Copy
Fax
Scan
2.
9-20

User Guide
Tools
Phone Book
The machine's Phone Book has Speed Dial and Group functions. Speed Dial and Group are handy ways
to quickly specify recipients when sending faxes.
Notes
The Speed Dial and Group functions are not displayed when the Fax Kit (option) is not mounted.
You cannot register, edit, or delete the Phone Book in the following cases:
When there are present jobs that have not been sent as determined by the specified
transmission time
When receiving or sending faxes
When Junk Filter is On
When Forward is On
You can also register recipients using Address Book Editor. Click the Install Fax Utility included in
User Tools on the Driver CD Kit CD-ROM to install the Address Book Editor on the computer being
used. When the Address Book Editor is saved to the machine after the information is registered,
the Phone Book entries on the machine are replaced with the new data. For more information on
registration, see the Address Book Editor's Help Information.
Speed Dial
The Speed Dial function lets you register fax recipient names and fax numbers. You can register up to
99 Speed Dial entries.
The Speed Dial entries registered as 001 to 036 are the same as One Touch buttons 1 to 36 on the
control panel. Pressing the One Touch buttons is a handy way to quickly specify fax recipients.
1. In the Phone Book screen, select Speed Dial, and then press the OK button.
For information on how to display the Phone Book screen, refer to System Settings Procedure on
page 9-1.
Phone Book
Speed Dial...
Group...
2.
To register a new entry, select an unregistered Speed Dial number, and then click the OK button.
Note To edit an existing Speed Dial number, select the number to edit.

User Guide
9-21
Tools
3.
Select Name, and then press the OK button.
Speed Dial 001
[C]:Delete
Name...
Fax Number...
Apply Settings...
4.
Enter the name to register, and then press the OK button.

Note Names can be up to 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters in length.
001:Enter Name
_
5.
Select Fax Number, and then press the OK button.
6.
Enter the fax number to register, and then press the OK button.
Note You can enter up to 50 characters for the fax number (numbers as well as the number sign
(#), asterisk (*), and underscore (_)).
001:Enter Phone No.

_
7.
Select Apply Settings, and then press the OK button.
8.
Select Yes, and then press the OK button.
Apply Settings
[Are You Sure?]
Yes
No
9-22

User Guide
Tools
Deleting a Speed Dial Entry

Follow the steps below to delete a registered Speed Dial entry. XXX (Not In Use) is displayed for the
deleted entries.
1. Select the speed dial number that you wish to delete on the Speed Dial screen, and then press the
OK button.
2.
Press the C (Clear) button.

C (Clear) button
3.
Delete Dial
[Are You Sure?]
Yes
No

User Guide
9-23
Tools
Group
The Group function lets you group the registered Speed Dial entries into groups (up to 6 groups).
Note You can register up to 99 Speed Dial entries in each group.
1.
In the Phone Book screen, select Group, and then press the OK button.
For information on how to display the Phone Book screen, refer to System Settings Procedure on
page 9-1.
Phone Book
Speed Dial...
Group...
2.
To create a new group, select an unregistered group number, and then press the OK button.
Note To edit an existing group, select the group to edit.
Group
01 (Not in Use)
02 Group02
03 (Not in Use)
3.
Select Name, and then press the OK button.
Group 01
[C]:Delete
Name...
Speed Dial Number...
Apply Settings...
4.
Enter the group name to register, and then press the OK button.
Note Names can be up to 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters in length.
01:Enter Name
_
5.
Select Speed Dial Number, and then press the OK button.
Group 01
[C]:Delete
Name...
Group01
Speed Dial Number...
Apply Settings...
9-24

User Guide
Tools
6.
Select the speed dial number to register to the group.
7.
Press the
button.
Notes
-
A checkmark appears in the checkbox next to each Speed Dial entry. Pressing the button
again erases the checkmark .
If you press the # button, you can check the details for the selected Speed Dial entry. Press
the Back button to return the display to the previous screen.
You can select up to 99 Speed Dial entries at once.
button
8.
Repeat Steps 6 and 7 to select the speed dial numbers to register to the group, and then press the
OK button.
9.
Select Apply Settings, and then press the OK button.
Group 01
[C]:Delete
Name...
Group01
Speed Dial Number... 002,010
Apply Settings...
10. Select Yes, and then press the OK button.
Apply Settings
[Are You Sure?]
Yes
No

User Guide
9-25
Tools
Deleting a Group
Follow the steps below to delete a registered Group. XX (Not In Use) is displayed for deleted groups.
1. In the Group screen, select the group to delete, and then press the OK button.
Group
01 Group01
02 Group02
03 (Not in Use)
Group 02
[C]:Delete
Name...
Group02
Speed Dial Number... 005,009
Apply Settings...
2.
Press the C (Clear) button.

C (Clear) button
3.
Delete Group
[Are You Sure?]
Yes
No
9-26

User Guide
Tools
Wired Network
Used to make network environment settings.
Note This function does not display unless the Network Kit is installed.
For information on how to display the Wired Network screen, refer to System Settings Procedure on
page 9-1.
Ethernet
Used to set the Ethernet type to use.
Speed
You can select Auto, 10BASE-T Half, 10BASE-T Full, 100BASE-TX Half, or 100BASE-TX Full.
MAC Address
You can select Auto, 10BASE-T Half, 10BASE-T Full, 100BASE-TX Half, or 100BASE-TX Full.
TCP/IP
Sets TCP/IP.
This setting is activated after restarting the machine.
IP Mode
Sets the TCP/IP operation mode.
IPv4 is set at the time of factory shipment.
Dual Stack
Select this setting when using the machine in an environment using both IPv4 and
IPv6.
IPv4
Select this setting when using the machine in an IPv4 environment.
IPv6
Select this setting when using the machine in an IPv6 environment.

User Guide
9-27
Tools
IPv4
Sets IPv4.
Get IP Address
Sets the method used to acquire the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address.
DHCP
Automatically acquires the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address from the
DHCP server.
BOOTP
BOOTP server.
RARP
Automatically acquires the IP address from the RARP server.
DHCP/AutoNet
DHCP server.
If communication with the DHCP server fails, the AutoIP function is activated to
allocate an IP address (169.254.xxx.xxx). If communication with the DHCP server is
later re-established, the settings are reacquired from the DHCP server.
Control Panel
The setting used to set the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address
manually.
IP Address
When Get IP Address is set to Control Panel, the IP address is set by manual input from
the numeric keypad.
Note: Enter the IP address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where each 'xxx' is a value
between 0 and 255.
Subnet Mask
When Get IP Address is set to Control Panel, the subnet mask is set by manual input
from the numeric keypad.
Note: Enter the subnet mask in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where each 'xxx' is a value
between 0 and 255.
Gateway Address
When Get IP Address is set to Control Panel, the gateway address is set by manual
input from the numeric keypad.
Note: Enter the gateway address in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, where each 'xxx' is a
value between 0 and 255.
IPv6
Sets IPv6.
Set IPv6
Sets whether to use IPv6.

You can select Disable or Enable.
Disable is set at the time of factory shipment.
IP Address
Use the numeric keypad to enter the IP address.
9-28

User Guide
Tools
Prefix
Use the numeric keypad to set the prefix length of the IP address (between 1 to 128).
Gateway Address
Use the numeric keypad to enter the gateway address.
IP Filter
Sets whether to restrict the IP addresses that can access the machine.
Notes
The IP filter is a function used to suppress printing using TCP/IP.
This setting is activated after restarting the machine.
IPv4
Sets whether to restrict the IPv4 addresses that can access the machine. When this setting is enabled,
you can register up to 10 IP addresses/subnet masks to support.
IPv6
Sets whether to restrict the IPv6 addresses that can access the machine. When this setting is enabled,
you can register up to 10 IP addresses/subnet masks to support.

User Guide
9-29
Tools
Copy Settings
Used to set the functions for the Copy feature.
For information on how to display the Copy Settings screen, refer to System Settings Procedure on
page 9-1.
Sharpness
You can select Soften +2, Soften +1, Normal, Sharpen +1, or Sharpen +2.
Normal sets the sharpness at the standard level; Soften +2 sets it lower; Sharpen +2 sets it higher.
For more information, refer to Scan Settings > Sharpness on page 9-32.
Sets whether to suppress the documents background color.
You can select Off or On.
For more information, refer to Scan Settings > Background Suppression on page 9-32.

Sets the background suppression level used when Background Suppression is set to On in Copy
Settings.
You can select from Low, Normal, Higher +1, Higher +2, and Higher +3. Normal is the standard
suppression level, Low is the lowest suppression Level, and Higher +3 is the highest suppression level.
For more information, refer to Scan Settings > Back. Suppression Level on page 9-32.
Used to set the preset Reduce/Enlarge value by selecting Copy > Reduce/Enlarge in the Default
Settings.
You can set a value between 25 and 400% (in 1% increments).
400% is set at the time of factory shipment.
For more information, refer to Default Settings > Copy > Reduce/Enlarge on page 9-8.
9-30

User Guide
Tools
Auto Collate
Sets to rotate for the Collated function when document is placed in the document feeder.
You can select Do Not Rotate or Rotate.
Do Not Rotate is set at the time of factory shipment.

User Guide
9-31
Tools
Scan Settings
Used to set the functions for the Scan feature.
The following settings are available for the Scan to E-mail and Scan to PC (Network) functions. For the
TWAIN and Windows Imaging Acquisition (WIA) application settings, the settings that you specify
with the application are applied.
For information on how to display the Scan Settings screen, refer to System Settings Procedure on
page 9-1.
Sets the default value displayed for Background Suppression. Sets whether to suppress the
document's background color.
You can select Off or On.
For more information, refer to Copy Settings : Background Suppression on page 9-30.

Sets the background suppression level used when Background Suppression is set to On in Scan
Settings. This setting is enabled when scanning black-and-white documents.
You can select from Low, Normal, Higher +1, Higher +2, and Higher +3. Normal is the standard
suppression level, Low is the lowest suppression Level, and Higher +3 is the highest suppression level.
For more information, refer to Copy Settings : Back. Suppression Level on page 9-30.
Image Compression
Used to set the file compression ratio when document is scanned.
You can select Higher +2, Higher +1, Normal, Lower -1, or Lower -2. Higher +2 is the highest
compression ratio, and Lower -2 is the lowest compression ratio.
Selecting Higher+2 reduces file size, but also reduces image resolution.
Sharpness
Sets the default sharpness value displayed for Sharpness.
9-32

User Guide
Tools
You can select Soften +2, Soften +1, Normal, Sharpen +1, or Sharpen +2.
Normal sets the sharpness at the standard level; Soften +2 sets it lower; Sharpen +2 sets it higher.
For more information, refer to Copy Settings : Sharpness on page 9-30.
Edge Erase
shadows created around the edges of the paper when scanning with the document cover open.
For more information, refer to Default Settings > ID Card Copy > Edge Erase on page 9-10.
For more information, refer to Default Settings > Fax > Edge Erase on page 9-13
Maximum Attachment Size

Sets the maximum file size for an e-mail attachment.
You can set values between 2 and 20 MB (in 1 MB increments).
20 MB is set at the time of factory shipment.
Recipient Confirmation
Sets whether to confirm the recipient information before sending data.
Off is set at the time of factory shipment.

User Guide
9-33
Tools
Fax Settings
Used to set the functions for the Fax feature.
If Unknown is set for Region, no other settings besides Region are shown. When you use the fax
function, be sure to make the Region setting and Clock in System Settings.
The machine needs to be restarted whenever the Fax Settings are changed.
For information on how to display the Fax Settings screen, refer to System Settings Procedure on
page 9-1.
Mode
Sets the method used to receive faxes automatically when an external phone is mounted.
This item is set to Fax at the time of factory shipment.
Fax
Set Fax Mode to use machine as a fax machine only. The machine receives faxes automatically after
the number of rings set in Fax Answer.
Note The machine can also be used as a phone to make outgoing calls.
Tel/Fax
Set TEL/FAX Mode to use the machine as both a fax machine and phone. Phone calls can be answered
by picking up the receiver before the number of rings set in Tel/Fax Answer is exceeded. If the call is
from fax machine, the fax can be received manually.
Fax Answer
Sets the external phone's number of rings when Mode is set to Fax.
You can set a value between 1 and 15 redials (in increments of 1).
Note The default value varies by region. The default value is set when Region is set.
Tel/Fax Answer
Sets the external phone's number of rings when Mode is set to Tel/Fax.
You can set a value between 1 and 15 rings (in increments of 1).
The time is set to 2 times at the time of factory shipment.
The default value varies by region. The default value is set when Region is set.
9-34

User Guide
Tools
Line Volume
Sets the external phone's number of rings when Mode is set to Tel/Fax.
You can set a value between 1 and 15 rings (in increments of 1).
The time is set to 2 times at the time of factory shipment.
The default value varies by region. The default value is set when Region is set.
Line Type
Sets the line type to use.
PSTN is set at the time of factory shipment.
PSTN
Set for fax transmissions on a standard phone line.
PBX
Set for fax transmissions on an internal private branch exchange within a corporation, or on a public
line.
Dial Type
Sets the dial type.
You can select PB, DP (10 PPS), or DP (20 PPS).
Call Interval
Sets the amount of time the machine waits between the end of transmission and the start of the next.
You can set a value between 3 and 255 seconds (in 1 second increments).
Setting a high Call Interval value increases the total time needed for "broadcast" faxes (sent to multiple
recipients at once), but the machine can receive faxes during the waiting periods.
Redial Attempts
Sets the number of times the automatic redial operation is performed when the recipient is busy or
does not answer.

User Guide
9-35
Tools
Redial Interval
Sets the amount of time the machine waits between redials.
You can set a value between 1 and 15 minutes (in 1 minute increments).
The time is set to 5 minutes at the time of factory shipment.
Junk Filter
Used to set whether to block junk faxes from being received or not.
Send Header
Sets whether to record and send fax header information (such as date, sender, and recipient) at the
beginning of faxes.
Company Name
Used to register the sender's name to be sent to the recipient when a fax is sent.
You can enter up to 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters.
Fax Number
Used to register the machine's fax number to be sent to the recipient when a fax is sent.
You can enter up to 20 digits, including numbers (0 to 9).
Forward
Sets whether or not to forward a fax document received on this machine to another fax number.
9-36

User Guide
Tools

Notes
When On is selected, faxes cannot be forwarded if there are more than 20 faxes scheduled for
transmission. Incoming faxes are printed out.
If the recipient of the forwarded fax is also set to forward received faxes and has specified the
machine as the recipient, an infinite loop of forwarding operations could result. Ensure an infinite
loop will not result when setting the fax forwarding number.
If the fax could not be forwarded due to the recipient's line being busy or a similar issue, the fax
number is redialed. Incoming faxes are printed out if the number of redials exceeds the number of
redials set on the machine.
Off
Prints received faxes.
On
Forwards received faxes to the specified fax number. Select On and press the OK button to display the
Speed Dial entry screen. Use the numeric keypad to enter the fax forwarding number.
Auto Reduce On Receipt

Used to set incoming oversized faxes to reduce in size and print them to fit in a single page.
Border Limit
Used to set incoming oversized faxes to only print the portion that fits on in a single page.
Receive Size
Used to restrict the paper size incoming faxes are printed. When an incoming fax is received, the
machine notifies the sender fax machine of the required fax size.
A4/B4/A3 is set at the time of factory shipment.
Notes
Document width is used to indicate the fax size restriction.
If you received a fax in B4 paper size when the machine has no tray containing B5 paper, it is
printed in A3 paper. If the machine has the tray for B4 paper size ready and the tray is empty, the
message for loading paper is displayed on the screen.
Auto
The machine prints incoming faxes by selecting the tray containing the paper of the correct size.
A4
The machine restricts incoming faxes to A4 size (210 mm width).

User Guide
9-37
Tools
A4/B4
The machine restricts incoming faxes to A4 size (210 mm width) and B4 size (257 mm width).
A4/B4/A3
The machine restricts incoming faxes to A4 size (210 mm width), B4 size (257 mm width), and
A3 size (297 mm width).
Print Size (Received Letter)

Used to set the paper size to print document that was sent in Letter or A4 size.
Letter/A4 is set at the time of factory shipment.
The machine operates according to the Auto Reduce on Receipt or Border Limit settings on whether
to automatically reduce or discard portions of A4 document received when the paper size is set to
Letter/A4 or Letter.
Letter/A4
The machine prints the fax in Letter size first. If the Letter size is not available, it prints
in A4 size.
Letter
The machine prints the fax in Letter size.
Immediate Fax Switch

When the amount of remaining memory becomes low while saving an outgoing fax, the machine can
be set to start transmission during the save operation when the amount of remaining memory reaches
a set value. This is referred to as Immediate communication. Used to set the remaining memory level
to switch to the immediate communication.
You can set a value between 0 and 99% (in 1% increments).
0% is set at the time of factory shipment.
Off Hook Level

Used to set the level for detecting an off-the-hook receiver when an external phone is mounted.
You can select from 10 volts, 15 volts, 20 volts, 25 volts, and 35 volts. 10 volts is the lowest extraction
level, and 35 volts is the highest extraction level.
10 volts is set at the time of factory shipment.
Region
Sets the machine's region of use.
You can select from Unknown, India, Russia, South Africa, Central Africa, Emirates, Saudi Arabia,
Egypt, Mexico, or Turkey.
9-38

User Guide
Tools
Unknown is set at the time of factory shipment.

Notes
If you change the Region setting after you have started using the machine, all the settings
including those in Phone Book and reserved fax or other jobs will be reset. Change the Region
setting with care.
When Unknown is set, it is the only setting displayed under Fax Settings. In addition, Fax in
Default Settings is not displayed.
Follow the steps below to make the settings.
1. In the Fax Settings screen, select Region.
Fax Settings
Immediate Fax...
Off Hook Level...
Region...
20%
10 volts
Unknown
For information on how to display the Fax Settings screen, refer to System Settings Procedure on
page 9-1.
2.
3.

Select your region, and then press the OK button.
4.
Select Yes (Restart Required), and then press the OK button.

Restart the machine (turn the power off and then turn it back on again).
Apply Settings
[Are You Sure?]
No
Yes (Restart Required)
Activity Report
Sets whether the machine automatically prints transmission results (Activity Reports) after sending
and receiving faxes.
Enable Auto Print is set at the time of factory shipment.

User Guide
9-39
Tools
Enable Auto Print

The machine automatically prints transmission results after every 50 faxes sent/received.
Note The maximum number of saved transmission logs is 100 for sent logs and 300 for received logs.
When Enable Auto Print is set to On, fax transmission is disabled when the number of saved documents
in either the sent or receive log exceeds the maximum number of saved logs if the report cannot be
printed due to the machine being out of paper or a similar issue. If sending or receiving faxes again,
manually print an Activity Report.
For information on how to print an Activity Report manually, refer to Printing Reports/Lists on page 107.
Disable Auto Print

The machine does not print transmission results.
This cannot be selected if the number of faxes sent or received exceeds 40.
Transmission Report
Sets the machine's transmission result printing operation after sending a fax.
Print On Error is set at the time of factory shipment.
Note The Transmission Report cannot be printed manually.
Always Print
The machine prints the transmission result after sending each fax.
Print On Error
The machine prints the transmission result when fax transmission fails.
Never Print
The machine does not print the transmission result regardless of whether fax transmission succeeds or
fails.
Broadcast Report
Sets the operation to print machine's transmission result after sending a fax "broadcast" (the same fax
sent to multiple recipients at once).
Always Print is set at the time of factory shipment.
Note The Broadcast Report cannot be printed manually.
9-40

User Guide
Tools
Always Print
The machine prints the transmission result after sending each fax broadcast.
Print On Error
The machine prints the transmission result when transmission to one or more of the recipients in the
broadcast fails.
Never Print
The machine does not print the transmission result regardless of whether fax transmission succeeds or
fails.
Protocol Report
Sets the machine's protocol information printing operation after sending faxes.
Never Print is set at the time of factory shipment.
Always Print
Prints whenever fax transmission has been completed.
Print On Error
The machine prints the transmission result when fax transmission failed.
Never Print
The machine doesn't print the transmission result regardless of whether fax transmission succeeded or
failed.
For information on how to print a Protocol Report manually, refer to Printing Reports/Lists on page 107.

User Guide
9-41
Tools
System Settings
Used to make other settings.
For information on how to display the System Settings screen, refer to System Settings Procedure on
page 9-1.
Power Saver Timer

Used to make settings for the Energy Saver function.
Low Power Mode

Sets the amount of time the machine waits before entering Low Power mode.
The machine's power is not turned OFF completely in Low Power mode. Instead, this mode creates a
balance between low power consumption and short warm-up time by controlling the temperature of
the fusing unit to a level midway between the power OFF temperature and the "Ready" temperature.
1 minute is set at the time of factory shipment.
Sleep Mode
Used to set the amount of time the machine waits before entering Low Power mode or Sleep mode.
Sleep mode minimizes power consumption by shutting off the power to all components except the
controller. Warm-up time in Sleep mode is longer than in Low Power mode.
1 minute is set at the time of factory shipment.
Auto Reset
Sets the amount of time the machine waits before automatically returning to the Default Display
screen when no operation is being performed.
You can select 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 45 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, 3 minutes, or 4 minutes.
45 seconds is set at the time of factory shipment.
Auto Print
Used to set the amount of time the machine waits after operating the control panel, loading paper on
the document feeder, or closing a tray until starting to print automatically.
9-42

User Guide
Tools
You can set a value between 1 and 240 seconds (in 1 second increments).
Idle Timeout
The amount of time to wait is set according to the operations listed below when document is placed on
the document glass and being scanned.
The amount of time that passes to continue to the next job assuming that there is no additional
document to be loaded.
You can select 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, or 90 seconds.
Job Cancel
Sets whether the machine automatically cancel the job when an error occurs.
You can select On or Off. If On is selected, you can set a value between 60 and 5940 seconds (in 1
second increments).
Clock
Sets the time on the machine's system clock. This item sets the clock used to print the current time on
the reports.
Notes
This item can only be set when the Fax Kit or Network Kit is installed.
When setting the time for the first time, first set the Date Format and Time Format.
Date & Time

Set the current date and time.
You can select from UTC -12:00 to +13:00.

User Guide
9-43
Tools
UTC -5:00 is set at the time of factory shipment.

1. In the System Settings screen, select Clock, and then press the OK button.
For information on how to display the System Settings screen, refer to System Settings Procedure
on page 9-1.
System Settings
Idle Timeout...
Job Cancel...
Clock...
2.
30 seconds
600 seconds
Select Date & Time, and then press the OK button.
Clock
Date & Time...
Date Format...
Time Format...
3.
yy/mm/dd
24H
Select Time Zone, and then press the OK button.

Note You can select a value between UTC -12:00 and UTC +13:00 for Time Zone.
Time Zone
[OK]:Next Screen
UTC -12:00
UTC -11:00
UTC -10:00
4.
Set the date.
Date
[OK]:Next Screen
1900 / 1 / 1
Use the numeric keypad (buttons 0 to 9) to enter the date.

Example: To enter January 23, 2013 as the date, press 2, 0, 1, 3,
0, 1,
2, 3.
Notes
Enter the date in the display format set in Date Format.
Press the
and
buttons to move the cursor.
Date
[OK]:Next Screen
2013 / 1 / 23
5.
9-44

User Guide
Tools
6.
Set the current time.

Use the numeric keypad (buttons 0 to 9) to enter the current time.
Time
[OK]:Save
(0:00 - 23:59)
00 : 00
Notes
Enter the time in the display format (12- or 24-hour clock) set by Time Format.
When 12H has been set for Time Format, enter a value between 1:00 and 12:59.
When 24H has been set for Time Format, enter a value between 0:00 and 23:59.
7.
8.
Press the
and
buttons to move the cursor.
Check the settings, and then press the OK button.
Date Format
Set the date format.
You can select from yy/mm/dd, mm/dd/yy, or dd/mm/yy.
yy/mm/dd is set at the time of factory shipment.
1. In the Clock screen, select Date Format, and then press the OK button.
Clock
Date & Time...
Date Format...
Time Format...
2.
yy/mm/dd
24H
Select the date display format, and then press the OK button.
Date Format
yy/mm/dd
mm/dd/yy
dd/mm/yy
Time Format
Set the time format.
You can select from 12H or 24H.

User Guide
9-45
Tools
24H is set at the time of factory shipment.

1. In the Clock screen, select Time Format, and then press the OK button.
Clock
Date & Time...
Date Format...
Time Format...
2.
yy/mm/dd
24H
Select the time display format, and then press the OK button.
Time Format
12H
24H
Audio Tones
Used to set the machine's operation and status audio tones.
All Tones
Sets the volume of all the machine's tones. Use this setting to set all the tones to the same volume.
You can select Soft, Normal, or Loud. Select Off to disable this tone.
Selection
Sets the volume of the tone that sounds when selectable buttons are pressed on the control panel.
Control Panel Alert

Sets the volume of the tone that sounds when non-selectable buttons are pressed on the control panel.
Machine Ready
Sets the volume of the tone that sounds at power on and at other times to indicate the machine is
ready for copying or printing.
9-46

User Guide
Tools
Job Complete
Sets the volume of the tone that sounds to indicate a job has completed normally.
Fault
Sets the volume of the tone that sounds to indicate a job has failed.
Alert Tone
Sets the volume of the tone that sounds to indicate a job has failed and been put on hold due to a
problem such as a document/paper jam.
Out of Paper
Sets the volume of the tone that sounds to indicate a job has failed and been put on hold because the
paper tray has run out of paper.
Consumables
Sets the volume of the tone that sounds to indicate the toner cartridge needs to be replaced.
Auto Clear
Sets the volume of the tone that sounds 5 seconds before the display will automatically return to the
Default Display screen when Auto Reset has been set.

User Guide
9-47
Tools
Base Tone
Sets the standard volume of buttons that toggle settings (buttons that can be pressed repeatedly to
switch a setting among different values).
Job History Verbose

Sets the machine to record Copy and USB Scan jobs on the Job History Reports.
Auto Paper Selection

Sets the target trays for the automatic tray selection.
Note Tray 1 is included in the automatic tray selection.
Tray 2 to 4
Sets each tray to be included in the automatic tray selection.
Note Tray 2 to Tray 4 are displayed when the optional paper trays are mounted.
User Control
Used to restrict the users permitted to use the Copy feature.
When this setting is enabled, users must enter a passcode to use the Copy feature.
Off
Users are permitted to use the Copy feature without entering a passcode.
9-48

User Guide
Tools
Single
Users must enter a single specified passcode to use the Copy feature. Use the system administrator's
passcode.
For information on how to set a passcode, refer to System Administrator Passcode on page 9-51.
Multiple
Select this setting when managing the amount of copy paper used by user or group using Accounting.
You can set passcodes and maximum number of impressions permitted for copying for each user or
group.
For more information on setting procedure, refer to User Management on page 9-52.
Paper Size Settings

Used to specify the size of paper to be automatically detected when you use standard sizes of a
document or the machine is set to detect sizes of a document.
You can select from A/B Series (8K/16K), Inch Series, A/B Series (8 x 13"), or A/B Series (8 x 13"/8 x
14").
A/B Series (8K/16K) is set at the time of factory shipment.
Show Toner Alert

Used to set how frequently to display messages on screen when it is close to the time to replace the
toner cartridge.
You can select from Off, At Startup, or At Auto Clear.
At Startup is set at the time of factory shipment.
Show Drum Alert

Used to set how frequently to display messages on the screen when it is close to the time to replace the
drum cartridge.
At Startup is set at the time of factory shipment.
Show Drum Warning

Used to set how frequently to display messages on the screen when the drum cartridge life is ended.
At Auto Clear is set at the time of factory shipment.
User Guide
9-49
Tools
Maintenance
Used to clear the counter of the consumables/periodic replacement parts when directed by your local
Xerox representative.
Note Do not use this function except as necessary.
9-50

User Guide
Tools
Security Settings
System Administrator Passcode
Used to set the passcode for entering System Administration mode.
You can enter between 4 to 6 numbers from 0 to 9.
1111 (four "1" digits) is set at the time of factory shipment.
1. In the Tools screen, select Security Settings, and then press the OK button.
For information on how to display the Tools screen, refer to System Settings Procedure on page 91.
Tools
Fax Settings...
System Settings...
Security Settings...
2.
Select System Admin. Passcode, and then press the OK button.
Security Settings
System Admin. Passcode...
3.
Enter the desired passcode in the New Passcode field.

Note The entered passcode is displayed as asterisks (*).

New Passcode
[* * * * * ]
4.

User Guide
9-51
Tools
User Management
When Multiple is selected under User Control, you can manage the amount of copy paper used per
user or group using Accounting. Used to set passcodes and the maximum number of impressions
permitted for copying as well as to check the total number of impressions copied for each user or
group. Also used to reset the total number of impressions copied for all users and groups at once.
For more information on User Control, refer to User Control on page 9-48.
Confirm/Edit
You can manage the copy paper usage for up to 30 users or groups (User 01 to User 30) using
Accounting. You can set the passcode and maximum number of copied impressions permitted for each
user from User 01 to User 30.
Note Each user can check his or her total number of impressions copied and maximum number of
permitted impressions.
For more information on how to check user copying information, refer to Checking the Total Number of
Impressions Copied on page 5-24.
1. In the Tools screen, select User Management, and then press the OK button.
Tools
System Settings...
User Management...
2.
Select Confirm/Edit, and then press the OK button.
User Management
Confirm/Edit...
Reset Copied Impressions...
3.
Select the user to display or set, and then press the OK button.
Confirm/Edit
User 01...
User 02...
User 03...
9-52

User Guide
Tools
Login Passcode
Used to display or set the passcode used to log in to the machine.
Note You can enter between 4 to 6 numbers from 0 to 9.
1.
Select Login Passcode, and then press the OK button.
User 01
Login Passcode...
Copied Impressions...
Copy Limit (Unit: Impressions...)
The current passcode is displayed.
Note To change the passcode, press the C (Clear) button to erase the current passcode, and then
use the numeric keypad to enter a new passcode.
Login Passcode
[0001
2.
Copied Impressions
Displays the total number of impressions the user has currently copied.
1. Press Copied Impressions.
User 01
Login Passcode...
2.
Check the value, and then press the Back button.
Copied Impressions
352

User Guide
9-53
Tools
Copy Limit (Unit: Impressions)

Used to display or set the maximum number of impressions the user is permitted to copy.
1. Press Copy Limit (Unit: Impressions).
User 01
Login Passcode...
2.
To change the value, use the numeric keypad to enter the maximum number of permitted
impressions.
Copy Limit (Unit: Impressions)

[0 - 255]
15 (x 1000)
3.
Notes
You can set a value between 0 and 255 (Unit: 1,000 impressions) for the maximum number
of permitted impression . Set 0 to disable the restriction on maximum number of copies.
The user's current total number of impressions is reset to 0 when the maximum number of
permitted impressions is changed.

You can select whether to reset the total number of copied impressions for all registered users, User01
to User30, at once. Click Yes to reset the total number of impressions copied to 0.
1. In the Tools screen, select User Management, and then press the OK button.
Tools
System Settings...
User Management...
9-54

User Guide
Tools
2.
Select Reset Copied Impressions, and then press the OK button.
User Management
Confirm/Edit...
Reset Copied Impressions...
3.

No
Yes

User Guide
9-55
Tools
9-56

User Guide
Machine Status
10
This chapter describes how to check the basic information and status of your machine.
Note Some settings are not displayed on some models. An optional component is required. For more
Checking Consumables
The Machine Status screen displays the status of consumables such as the toner cartridge and the
drum cartridge.
Follow the steps below to check the status of consumables.
1. Press the Machine Status button.
Machine Status
Language...
IP Address...
Billing Informat...
Toner Status:
OK
Drum Status:
OK
Toner Status
Shows the toner cartridge status.
OK
Replacement is not currently needed.
Reorder
Replacement is not currently needed, but the cartridge will need to be replaced soon.
Make sure to have a new toner cartridge on hand.
Replace Soon
Replacement is needed soon.

User Guide
10-1
Machine Status
Replace Now
Replacement is needed now.
Error
A toner cartridge error occurred.
Drum Status
Shows the drum cartridge status.
OK
Replacement is not currently needed.
Reorder
Replacement is not currently needed, but the cartridge will need to be replaced soon.
Make sure to have a new drum cartridge on hand.
Replace Soon
Replacement is needed soon.
Replace Now
Replacement is needed now.
Error
A drum cartridge error occurred.
10-2

User Guide
Machine Status
Selecting Language
You can select from the following languages for the user interface language used in the control panel
display:
English
French
Italian
German
Spanish
Brazilian Portuguese
Russian
Greek
Turkish
Polish
Czech
Hungarian
Romanian
Note The default language may vary depending on the region of purchase.
Follow the steps below to select the language.
2.
In the Machine Status screen, select Language.
Machine Status
Language...
IP Address...
Billing Informat...
Toner Status:
OK
Drum Status:
OK

User Guide
10-3
Machine Status
3.
Select the display language from the Language screen.
4.
10-4

User Guide
Machine Status
Checking the Machines IP Address

You can display the IPv6 or IPv4 address of your machine.
1.
Press the Machine Status button.

2.
In the Machine Status screen, select IP Address.
Machine Status
Language...
IP Address...
Billing Informat...
3.
Toner Status:
OK
Drum Status:
OK
The IP address of your machine is displayed.
IP Address
IPv4 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
IPv6 xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:
xxxx:xxxx:xxxx

User Guide
10-5
Machine Status
Checking the Meter

The Billing Information screen shows the number of pages output by the machine, itemized as
follows:
Item
Description
Product Code
Product code of your machine.
Serial Number
Serial number of your machine.
Meter 1
The total number of pages printed for copying, printing, or incoming faxes.
Meter 2
The total number of copied pages.
Meter 3
The total number of printed pages.
Meter 4
The total number of incoming printed fax pages.
Meter 5*
Besides the Meters 1 to 4, the total number of pages printed for copying, printing, and
incoming faxes recognized as large size.
*Meter 5 is not displayed unless Large Size mode is set.

Follow the steps below to view information on the Billing Information screen.
4.
Select BillingInformation, and then press the OK button.
Machine Status
Language...
IP Address...
Billing Informat...
5.
Toner Status:
OK
Drum Status:
OK
Select the items to be verified.
Billing Information
Product Code
Serial Number
Meter1
10-6
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
5678

User Guide
Machine Status
Printing Reports/Lists
The machine can print the following reports/lists:
Report/List
Description
System Settings Report
Prints the machine's hardware configuration, version information, number of

pages printed by each function, status of consumables, the items that can be
set by Xerox CentreWare Internet Service, and their values.
Service Settings Report
Prints the items that can be set from the control panel in System
Job History Report
Shows the job execution results. Prints the results of the most recent jobs (up
to 50 jobs' worth).
Notes
When the Job History exceeds 50 jobs, each new job replaces the oldest
job in the history.
In some cases, page errors occurring during continuous printing of various
jobs (single-page jobs) due to paper jams and other problems may not be
registered to the Page Error History.
Refer to the Fax Activity Report for fax transmission results.
For information on how to set the machine to print the Job History Report
automatically, refer to Job History Verbose on page 9-48.
Error History Report
Prints information on errors generated in the machine. Up to 42 errors are

recorded sequentially from newest to oldest. Records information on up to 10
paper jams or similar errors.
Note: The Error History may record less than 42 errors if it contains errors with
a large amount of information. When the Error History exceeds its capacity,
each new error recorded replaces the oldest error.
Job Counter Report
Prints the total number of pages printed by each feature. In Multiple Account
mode, the total and the permitted maximum number of copies by each user
are also printed.
Fax Protocol Report
Prints the protocol information of fax transmission.
Fax Address Book *1
Prints the Speed Dial and Group information.
Address Book *3
Prints the e-mail and server addresses.

User Guide
10-7
Machine Status
Report/List
Description
Fax Activity Report *1
Used to check whether faxes were sent/received normally. For each

sent/received fax, prints the sender or recipient name and the transmission
result/status.
This report is not printed in the following cases:
When sending a fax using the redial function
When the fax waiting to be sent was deleted during transmission standby
or Redial standby
When the power was shut off or a system error occurred during
transmission
The machine can be set up to automatically print transmission results after
every 50 faxes are sent/received.
For information on how to set the machine to print the Fax Activity Report
automatically, refer to Activity Report on page 9-39.
For information about the items in the Fax Activity Report, refer to Fax Activity
Report on page 14-19).
Fax Transmission Report *1 *2
Prints the communication results.
Fax Broadcast Report *1 *2
Prints the broadcast communication results.
Unprocessed Fax Job *1 *2
Prints the list of accumulated documents being deleted due to power cut. This
report is automatically printed when the machine power is switched on.
Note The printed items will vary according to the machine's settings.
*1
The Fax Kit is required to use this feature.

The machine automatically prints the report. For more information, refer to Fax Settings on page 934.
*3
The Network Kit is required to use this feature.
*2
Follow the steps below to print a report or list.

10-8

User Guide
Machine Status
2.
Select Print Report, and then press the OK button.
Machine Status
IP Address...
Billing Informa...
Print Report...
3.
Toner Status:
OK
Drum Status:
OK
Select the report or list to print, and then press the OK button.
Note To cancel printing while a job is printing, press the Stop button, and select Yes on the
confirmation screen.
Print Report
[OK]:Print
System Settings
Service Settings
Job History

User Guide
10-9
Machine Status
Notification Display
You can set whether to display the Notification screen.
By default, the machine is set to display the notification.
2.
Select Notification Display, and then press the OK button.
Machine Status
Toner Status:
OK
Billing Informa...
Drum Status:
Print Report...
Notification Dis...
OK
3.
To disable the guidance, select Off, and then press the OK button.
Notification Display
Off
On
10-10

User Guide
Machine Status
ID Card Guidance Display

You can set whether to display the guidance of the ID Card Copy feature.
By default, the machine is set to display the guidance.
2.
Select ID Card Guidance, and then press the OK button.
Machine Status
Toner Status:
OK
Print Report...
Notification Di... Drum Status:
ID Card Guidance...
OK
3.
To disable the guidance, select Off, and then press the OK button.
ID Card Guidance Display

Off
On
- Sample of guidance for ID Card Copy -
ID Card Copy
1
and place it 5 mm away
from the top left corner
of the Document Glass.

User Guide
10-11
Machine Status
Quick-Button Selection Timer

You can set the displayed time length of the setting screens when a Quick-Button is pressed.
By default, the time length is set to 2 seconds.
4.
Select Quick-Button Selection Timer, and then press the OK button.
Machine Status
Toner Status:
OK
Notification Di...
ID Card Guidance... Drum Status:
Quick-Button Se...
OK
5.
Select the desired time, and then press the OK button.
Quick-Button Selection Timer

42 seconds
3 seconds
4 seconds
10-12

User Guide
Job Status
11
This chapter describes how to check the status of current or pending jobs, and how to cancel jobs.
Note Some settings cannot be displayed on some models. An optional component is required. For more
Checking Current/Pending Jobs

You can check the status of the following current or pending jobs:
Current print, scan or fax job
Pending print jobs
Pending fax jobs to send
Note Completed jobs are not displayed.
1.
Press the Job Status button.

Job Status button
Scroll to check the jobs.
Active Jobs
[Stop]:Delete
Fax (Print)
Print
Print
A4
A4
B5
Checking Reserved Fax Jobs

If any outgoing faxes have been reserved, you can check them in the Fax (Send) List screen.

User Guide
11-1
Job Status
In the Active Jobs screen, select Fax (Send), and then press the OK button.
Active Jobs
[Stop]:Delete
Fax(Send)...
The Fax (Send) List screen appears.
11-2

User Guide
Job Status
Canceling the Current Job

1.
Press the Job Status button.

Job Status button
2.
Select the current job.
Active Jobs
[Stop]:Delete
Fax (Print)
Print
Print
A4
A4
B5
3.

Stop button
Notes
You may not be able to cancel a job depending on the status of the job processing.
If the machine is being used as a local printer, it may take some time to cancel the job depending
on the type of print job being executed.

User Guide
11-3
Job Status
Canceling a Pending Fax Job

The only type of pending fax job that can be cancelled is a reserved fax job.
1. In the Active Jobs screen, select Fax (Send), and then press the OK button.
Active Jobs
[Stop]:Delete
Fax(Send)...
2.
Select a reserved fax job.
3.

Stop button
Note You may not be able to cancel a job depending on the status of the job processing.
11-4

User Guide
12
Maintenance
This chapter describes how to replace consumables and clean the machine.
Replacing Consumables
The machine is provided with the following consumables. We recommend the use of the following
consumables as they are manufactured to meet the specifications of the machine.
Type of Consumable /
Periodic Replacement Part
Product Code
Quantity/Box
Toner Cartridge
006R01573
1 unit/box
Drum Cartridge
013R00670
1 unit/box
Notes
Call the Customer Support Center to order replacement consumables/periodic replacement parts,
have product codes ready.
We recommend that you always keep spare consumables/periodic replacement parts available.
CAUTION: Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off spilled toner. Never use a vacuum cleaner for
the spills. It may catch fire by electric sparks inside the vacuum cleaner and cause explosion. If you
spill a large volume of toner, contact your local Xerox representative.
WARNING: Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Remaining toner in the cartridge
may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion. If you have a used toner cartridge no longer
needed, contact your local Xerox representative for its disposal.
CAUTION:
Keep drum cartridge and toner cartridge out of the reach of children. If a child accidentally
swallows toner, spit it out, rinse mouth with water, drink water and consult a physician
immediately.
When replacing drum cartridge and toner cartridge, be careful not to spill the toner. In case of any
toner spills, avoid contact with clothes, skin, eyes and mouth as well as inhalation.
If toner spills onto your skin or clothing, wash it off with soap and water. If you get toner particles
in your eyes, wash it out with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes until irritation is gone. Consult
a physician if necessary. If you inhale toner particles, move to a fresh air location and rinse your
mouth with water. If you swallow toner, spit it out, rinse your mouth with water, drink plenty of
water and consult a physician immediately.

User Guide
12-1
Maintenance
Handling consumables/periodic replacement parts

Do not store boxes of consumables/periodic replacement parts upright.
Do not unpack consumables/periodic replacement parts before use. Avoid storing
consumables/periodic replacement parts in the following locations:
High temperature and humid locations
Near heat-generating devices
Areas exposed to direct sunlight
Dusty areas
When using consumables/periodic replacement parts, carefully read precautions for use.
Precautions for use are instructed on their bodies or packages, or a precaution sheet is included in
their packages.
We recommend always keeping spare consumables/periodic replacement parts in stock.
When calling our Customer Support Center to order consumables/periodical replacement parts,
have the product codes ready.
The use of consumables/periodic replacement parts not recommended by Xerox could impair
machine quality and performance. Use only consumables/periodic replacement parts
recommended by Xerox.
Checking the status of consumables
You can check the status of consumables on the Machine Status screen.
For more information, refer to Checking Consumables on page 10-1.
12-2

User Guide
Maintenance
Replacing the Toner Cartridge

The following messages appear in the control panel's display when the remaining toner level becomes
low.
Error code
Message
Required Action
093-406
Toner Near Empty

Reorder a toner cartridge.
The toner cartridge will need to be

replaced after about 2,500 pages*. Have
a replacement toner cartridge ready.
Notes:
Do not replace the toner cartridge

in this condition. If you replace the
toner cartridge in this condition, the
toner cartridge icon will remain lit.
If you are using the toner cartridge
that came with the machine or a
Low Capacity Toner Cartridge, the
icon does not light up at this time.
093-400
Toner Empty Soon

Replace toner cartridge soon.
The toner cartridge will need to be

replaced after about 100 pages*. Have a
replacement toner cartridge ready.
093-912
Toner Empty
Replace toner cartridge.
The error indicator is lit. The toner

cartridge needs to be replaced. Replace
the toner cartridge.
*The remaining page yield for copy/print jobs is applicable when A4 paper LEF ( ) is used. The value is
an estimate and varies depending on the conditions such as the content printed, paper size, paper
type, and the machine operating environment.
Notes
When you replace a toner cartridge, toner may spill and soil the floor. We recommend laying
paper on the floor beforehand.
The use of toner cartridges not recommended by Xerox may degrade image quality and
performance. Use only toner cartridges recommended by Xerox.
When the remaining amount of toner is low, the machine may stop printing and display an error
code. If this occurs, replace the toner cartridge to resume copying or printing.
Leave the machine's power on when replacing the toner cartridge.
Copy or print density may decrease slightly after the message "Toner Near Empty Reorder a toner
cartridge." appears on the control panel display.
If you use a used toner cartridge, the message, "Toner Near Empty Reorder a toner cartridge." may
appear, and the number of pages that can be copied or printed may differ significantly.

User Guide
12-3
Maintenance
Follow the steps below to replace the toner cartridge.

1. Make sure that the machine is not operating, and open the front cover.
2.
Hold the handle of toner cartridge and lift it up slightly.
3.
Gently pull the toner cartridge out of the machine.
WARNING: Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Remaining toner in the cartridge
may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion.
If you have a used toner cartridge no longer needed, contact your local Xerox representative for its
disposal.
Notes
Pull out the toner cartridge slowly. Otherwise, toner may spill from the cartridge.
Return used toner cartridges to your local Xerox representative.
12-4

User Guide
Maintenance
4.
Unpack a new toner cartridge, and shake it lightly up/down, and left/right 10 times.
Note Do not touch the shutter.

User Guide
12-5
Maintenance
5.
Orient the toner cartridge with the arrow () facing up, and insert it as far as it will go.
6.
Close the front cover.
Note If the front cover is not completely closed, an error code will appear and the machine will remain
paused.
12-6

User Guide
Maintenance
Replacing the Drum Cartridge

The following error codes and icons display in the machine status diagram when the drum cartridge is
near the end of its service life.
Call the Customer Support Center to order a replacement drum cartridge.
Error Code
Message
Required Action
091-440
Drum Near End of Life

Drum cartridge is near end of life.
Reorder a drum cartridge.
The drum cartridge will need to be replaced

after the following number of pages. Have
a replacement drum cartridge ready.
WorkCentre 5024: Approx. 4,000 pages
WorkCentre 5022: Approx. 3,000 pages
091-402
091-441

Drum cartridge is near end of life.
Replace drum cartridge soon.
The drum cartridge will need to be replaced

after about 1,000 pages*. Have a
replacement drum cartridge ready.
091-430
Drum End of Life

Replace drum cartridge.
The error icon is lit. The drum cartridge

needs to be replaced. Replace the drum
cartridge.
091-401

Image quality problem may occur.
Replacement of drum cartridge is
recommended.
The error icon is lit. It is time of expiration

for the warranty period of the image
quality on the drum cartridge.
091-406
Drum end of Life

Machine problem may occur.
Replace drum cartridge.
The error icon is lit. It is time of expiration

for the warranty period of performance on
the drum cartridge.
091-424
Drum End of Life

Machine problem will occur soon.
Replace drum cartridge
immediately.
The error icon is lit. The machine detected

a failure due to the use of a dram cartridge
that is not supported.
Replace the drum cartridge immediately.
*The remaining page yield for copy/print jobs is applicable when A4 paper LEF ( ) is used. Actual
remaining service life will vary depending on the paper size and orientation, number of consecutive
pages printed, and the machine's operating environment. Use the figures above only as a guideline.
Notes
The use of drum cartridges not recommended by Xerox may degrade image quality and
performance. Use only drum cartridges recommended by Xerox.
Do not expose drum cartridges to direct sunlight or strong light from indoor fluorescent lighting.
Do not touch or scratch the surface of the drum. Doing so may result in unsatisfactory print
quality.

User Guide
12-7
Maintenance
Follow the steps below to replace the drum cartridge.

1.
2.
Turn off the machine power. Refer to Power Source on page 3-7.
Open the left cover and the front cover.
3.
Unscrew the two mounting screws and remove the drum.
4.
Remove the protective cover from the new drum.

CAUTION: .Take care to not touch the drum surface.
12-8

User Guide
Maintenance
5.
Install the new drum.

CAUTION: Align the guide on the bottom of the drum with receiver on the machine.
6.
Tighten the two screws finger tight.
7.
Remove the tape.
8.
Close the left cover and the front cover.
Note If the front cover is not completely closed, an error code will appear.

User Guide
12-9
Maintenance
Follow the steps below to initialize the counter.

1.
2.
3.
Turn on the machine power. Refer to Power Source on page 3-7.

Enter System Administration Mode. Refer to Entering System Administration Mode on page 9-1
for more information.
Press the and buttons to select. System Settings on the Tools screen.
4.

Note To return to the Tools screen, press the Clear All button. To return to the previous screen,
press the Back or s button.
5.
Select Maintenance from the System Settings screen.
6.
7.
Press the OK button

Enter the passcode 950807 on the Maintenance screen using the numeric keypad.
8.

Start button
12-10

User Guide
Maintenance
9.
When the Drum Cartridge screen appears, if the Drum Cartridge has been replaced with a new
one, press Start button again to initialize the NVM counter. Otherwise, press Clear All to cancel
this action.

User Guide
12-11
Maintenance
Cleaning the Machine

This section describes how to clean the machine outer casing, document cover, document feeder, and
document glass.
WARNING: When cleaning this product, use the designated cleaning materials exclusive to it.
Other cleaning materials may result in poor performance of the machine. To avoid fire and
explosion never use aerosol cleaners.
WARNING: When cleaning this product, always switch off the power and unplug it. Access to a
live machine interior may cause electric shock.
Cleaning the Exterior
1.
CAUTIONS:
Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other volatile liquids or spray insect repellent on the machine
as they might discolor, deform, or crack the covers.
Cleaning the machine with an excessive amount of water may cause the machine to malfunction
or damage documents during copying.
Wipe the exterior with a firmly wrung soft cloth moistened with water.
Notes
Do not use cleaning agents other than water or neutral detergent.
If you cannot remove the dirt easily, gently wipe the machine with a soft cloth moistened with a
small amount of neutral detergent.
2.
Wipe off any excess water with a soft cloth.
Cleaning the Document Cover and the Document Glass

If the document cover and document glass become soiled, smudges may appear on copies, or scanned
documents and the machine may not properly detect document sizes.
12-12

User Guide
Maintenance
To ensure clean copies at all times, clean the document cover and the document glass about once a
month.
1.
CAUTIONS:
Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other organic solvents. Doing so might damage the paint or
coating on plastic parts.
or damage documents during copying, or scanning.
Wipe the document cover with a soft cloth moistened with water to remove any dirt, and then
wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
Notes
If you cannot remove dirt easily, gently wipe the document cover with a soft cloth moistened with
a small amount of neutral detergent.
2.
Wipe the document glass with a soft cloth moistened with water to remove any dirt, and then
Notes
If you cannot remove dirt easily, gently wipe the document glass with a soft cloth moistened with
a small amount of neutral detergent.
Cleaning the Document Presser and the Narrow Glass Strip

If the document presser or narrow glass strip becomes soiled, smudges may appear on copies, or
scanned documents and the machine may not properly detect document sizes.

User Guide
12-13
Maintenance
To ensure clean copies at all times, clean the document presser and narrow glass strip about once a
month.
1.
CAUTIONS:
Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other organic solvents. Doing so might damage the paint or
or damage documents during copying or scanning.
Wipe the document presser with a soft cloth moistened with water to remove any dirt, and then
Notes
Do not press the film with excessive force as it can be easily damaged.
If you cannot remove dirt easily, gently wipe the document presser with a soft cloth moistened
with a small amount of neutral detergent.
2.
Wipe the narrow glass strip with a soft cloth moistened with water to remove any dirt, and then
wipe it with a soft dry cloth.
Notes
If you cannot remove dirt easily, gently wipe the narrow glass strip with a soft cloth moistened
with a small amount of neutral detergent.
12-14

User Guide
Maintenance
Cleaning the Document Feeder Rollers

If the document feeder rollers become soiled, smudges may appear on copies, or scanned documents
and paper jams may occur.
To ensure clean copies at all times, clean the document feeder rollers about once a month.
1.
CAUTIONS:
Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other organic solvents. Doing so might damage paint or
or damage documents during copying, scanning, or printing.
Lift the latch for the document feeder top cover until it is completely open.
Note When you fully open the cover, it comes to a fixed position. Open the cover gently.
2.
While turning the rollers, wipe them with a soft cloth moistened with water.
Notes
Use a cloth firmly wrung to prevent water drops from falling into the machine. If water gets into
the machine, it may cause the machine to malfunction.
If you cannot remove dirt easily, gently wipe the rollers with a soft cloth moistened with a small
amount of neutral detergent.
3.
Close the document feeder top cover until it clicks into place, and confirm that there is no space
between either side of the cover and the document feeder.

User Guide
12-15
Maintenance
12-16

User Guide
13
Problem Solving
This chapter provides possible solutions to various problems you may encounter with the machine.
Troubleshooting
Follow the troubleshooting procedures below to solve problems.
Problem
Cause/Action
The machine does not work properly.
Refer to Machine Problems on page 13-2.
A message is displayed.
For information on paper jams, refer to Paper

Jams on page 13-46.
For information on document jams, refer to
Document Jams on page 13-55.
Refer to Error Codes on page 13-32.
The image quality is poor.
Refer to Image Quality Problems on page 13-6.
Trouble during copying
Refer to Copying Problems on page 13-12.
Trouble during printing
Refer to Printer Problems on page 13-15.
Trouble during faxing
Refer to Fax Problems on page 13-17.
Trouble during scanning
Refer to Scan Problems on page 13-20.
Network problems
Refer to Network Related Problems on page 1325.
If the error is not resolved even after following the above procedure, contact our Customer Support
Center.

User Guide
13-1
Problem Solving
Machine Problems
Check the machine's status again if you suspect a malfunction.
Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
The machine is not

powered on.
Is the power switched on?
Switch the power on.

Refer to Power Source on page 3-7.
Is the power cord plugged

into the power outlet?
Switch the power off and make sure the power plug is
inserted securely. Then switch the power on.
Is the power cord

disconnected from the
machine?
Does the AC outlet supply
power properly?
Connect another appliance to the outlet to verify the

power supply.
The Error indicator

is blinking.
The system of the machine

or the components
installed may have a
problem.
Switch the power off, then on again. If the problem

persists, contact our Customer Support Center.
The Error indicator

is lit.
Is paper or document
jammed?
Remove the jammed paper or document.

Refer to Paper Jams on page 13-46.
Refer to Document Jams on page 13-55.
Is the machine front cover

or another cover open?
Follow the instructions in the displayed error code to

take the required action.
The display is dark.
Is the Energy Saver button

lit?
The machine is in an energy saver mode. Press the

control panel's Energy Saver button to turn off the
energy saver mode.
Unable to print
or copy.
Is there an error code

displayed in the control
panel's display?
Follow the instructions in the displayed error code to take

the required action.
Is the power cord

connected?
Switch the power off and make sure the power plug is
inserted securely into the power outlet. Then switch the
power on.
The Data indicator

does not light even
though you
instructed the
machine to print.
Is the interface cable

connected?
Check the interface cable connection.

Refer to Using the USB Interface on page 2-4.
Is the computers
environment correctly set?
Check the computers environment, such as print driver

settings.
Unable to print
although a print
job is instructed to
Tray 5 (bypass).
Is the specified paper size

loaded in the tray?
Follow the instructions in the displayed error code to

place paper of the correct size, and then try again.
Refer to Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass) on page 4-7.
13-2

User Guide
Problem Solving
Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
The print quality is

poor.
An image quality problem

may have occurred.
Take the required action described in Image Quality

Problems.
Refer to Image Quality Problems on page 13-6.
Unable to insert or
remove a tray.
Did you open a cover or

switch the machine off
during printing?
Do not forcibly insert or remove the tray. Switch off the

power. In a few seconds, switch on the power. When the
machine is ready to receive data, insert or remove the
tray.
Unable to copy
with the specified
size.
Is the document glass or

the document cover dirty?
Clean the document glass or document cover.

Refer to Cleaning the Document Cover and the
Document Glass on page 12-12.
Is the document a
transparency or highly
translucent medium?
Use the document glass to copy the document, placing a

sheet of white paper on top of it.
Is the document in the

correct position?
Place the document correctly.

Is the document loaded

correctly?
Are the document guides
on the document feeder
set in the correct positions?
Align the document guides correctly.

Is the document folded?
Smooth out the document and place it again correctly.


User Guide
13-3
Problem Solving
Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
Paper is often
jammed or
wrinkled.
Is paper loaded correctly in

the tray?
Load paper correctly.

Refer to Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4 (Optional) on
page 4-6.
Is the tray inserted

correctly?
Correctly insert the tray by firmly pushing it until it stops.

page 4-6.
Is the paper damp?
Replace the paper with a new one.
Is the paper curled?
Turn over the paper in the tray, or replace the paper with
a new one.
Are the paper and tray

settings correct?
Correctly set the paper settings to correspond to the

paper loaded.
Refer to Changing the Paper Size for Trays 1 to 4 on
page 4-9.
Are any torn pieces of

paper remaining or is there
a foreign object in the
machine?
Open the cover of the machine or pull out the tray to

remove any torn pieces or foreign objects.
Is non-standard paper
loaded in the tray?
Replace with paper that meets machine specifications.

Refer to Paper Types on page 4-1.
Is paper exceeding the

maximum fill line in the
tray?
Load paper in the tray so that it does not exceed the

maximum fill line.
page 4-6.
Are the paper guides set

correctly?
Load paper correctly, and align the paper guides to the

paper.
page 4-6.
Is the paper finely cut out?
Some paper types may not be cut out finely. Load the
paper after fanning it well.
A document is not
fed onto document
feeder.
Is the document small?
The minimum size of document that can be loaded into

the document feeder is A5 .
An error code
appears when
paper is loaded in
Bypass tray and the
Start button is
pressed.
Check the positions of the

paper guides of Bypass
tray.
Adjust the paper guides to the correct positions.

13-4

User Guide
Problem Solving
Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
Documents often
jam.
Are suitable types of

documents being used?
Correctly load the documents suitable for the document

feeder.
Are you using the irregular

shaped documents,
business cards,
transparencies, or thin
documents?
An edge of the
document is folded.
Are there any sticky tags,

paper clips or adhesive
tape on the document?
Remove any sticky tags, paper clips or adhesive tape

from the document before copying.
Are the document guides

set in the correct positions?
Adjust the document guide positions.

Is a piece of torn paper

remaining in the document
feeder?
Open the document feeder cover and check inside.

Is the document curled?
Flatten the curl and load the document again.

User Guide
13-5
Problem Solving
Image Quality Problems

If the image quality of the printout is poor, use the table below to find our most likely cause, and take
the action required.
If the image quality remains poor after taking the required action, contact our Customer Support
Center.
Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
Copies are dirty.
Is the document glass or

the document cover
dirty?
Clean the document glass or the document

cover.
Refer to Cleaning the Document Cover and the
Document Glass on page 12-12.
Is the document a
transparent type such as
a transparency medium?
When copying highly translucent documents,

dirt on the document cover shows up in the
copy. Place a sheet of white paper over the
document before copying.
Is the document on
colored or rough paper, or
a blueprint?
Adjust the copy density or remove the

background paper color before copying.
Refer to Lighten/Darken on page 5-14.
Is the document on
glossy printing paper?
Glossy printing paper easily sticks to the

document glass, and shadows can resemble dirt
in the copy. Place a transparency or transparent
film under the document before copying.
Black lines
appear in copies.
Is the document feeder's

narrow glass strip dirty?
Clean the narrow glass strip.

Refer to Cleaning the Document Presser and the
Narrow Glass Strip on page 12-13.
Copies are too

dark.
Is the copy density set to

a high value?
Adjust the copy density.

Copies are too

light.
Is the document light?
The copy is
slightly out of
position.
Is the paper loaded in the

correct position such as
the paper's leading edge
drifted away from the
corners of the tray?
13-6
Is the copy density set to

a low value?
Load paper correctly, and align the paper guides
to the paper.
Refer to Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4 (Optional)
on page 4-6.
Refer to Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass) on
page 4-7.

User Guide
Problem Solving
Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
Copies are out of

position or
crooked.
Have you placed the

document correctly?

Is the paper loaded

correctly in the tray?
Load the paper correctly.

on page 4-6.
If using Tray 5 (bypass),

have you loaded the
paper so that the paper
guides are in contact with
it?
Load the paper correctly.

page 4-7.
Are the document

feeder's document
guides misaligned?
Place the document correctly, moving the

document guides into contact with the edges of
the document.
Have you mounted the

tray securely?
Mount the tray by inserting it securely all the

way into the machine.
on page 4-6.
Is the paper damp?
Damp paper creates missing parts or unclear

copies. Replace it with paper from an unopened
pack.
Is the paper in the tray

creased or wrinkled?
Remove any problematic sheets, or replace the

paper with paper from an unopened pack.
Are you copying a cutand-pasted or creased

document?
Cut-and-pasted or creased parts of the

document might not be making proper contact
with the document glass. Place a stack of white
paper on top of the document to bring it into
proper contact with the document glass.
Are you attempting to

make an enlarged copy
of the document with too
large an enlargement
factor?
When making enlarged copies, some

enlargement factors can create striped patterns.
Adjust the copy enlargement factor.
Refer to Reduce/Enlarge on page 5-19.
Copies have
missing parts in
them.
Striped patterns
appear in copies.

User Guide
13-7
Problem Solving
Symptom
Possible cause
Remedy
The printout is
light (faded,
unclear).
The paper is damp.
Replace the paper with new paper.
The drum cartridge has

deteriorated or been
damaged.
Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.

Refer to Replacing the Drum Cartridge on
page 12-7.
The toner cartridge has run

out of toner.
Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.

Refer to Replacing the Toner Cartridge on
page 12-3.
Black spots
appear in copies.

damaged.

page 12-7.
Black or colored
lines appear in
printouts.

damaged.

page 12-7.
The narrow glass strip is

dirty.
Clean the narrow glass strip.

Refer to Cleaning the Document Presser and
the Narrow Glass Strip on page 12-13.
13-8

User Guide
Problem Solving
Symptom
Possible cause
Remedy
Dirt appears at
regular intervals
in the printout.
The paper feed path is dirty.
Print several sheets.

damaged.

page 12-7.
White spots
appear in areas
of black fill.
The paper is unsuitable.
Load the correct type of paper.

damaged.

page 12-7.
The printout
comes off on the
fingers.
The toner is not
fused to the
paper.
The paper is
contaminated
with toner.
The paper is damp.
Paper feed direction

User Guide
13-9
Problem Solving
Symptom
Possible cause
Remedy
The entire
printout is black.

damaged.

page 12-7.
A high-voltage power supply

failure may have occurred.
Contact our Customer Support Center.
Multiple pages were fed

through the machine at once
(double feeding).
Riffle through the stack of paper thoroughly

before loading it.

out of toner.

page 12-3.
A power failure or highvoltage power supply failure

may have occurred.
The printout
contains white
areas, or white or
colored stripes.
The paper is damp.
The printout is
faint overall.
When using the Bypass tray

to print, the paper size
specified in the print driver
does not match the type and
size of the paper actually
loaded.
Load paper of the correct type and size in

the Bypass tray.
page 4-7.
Multiple pages were fed

through the machine at
once.
Riffle through the stack of paper thoroughly

before loading it.
The printout is
blank.
13-10

User Guide
Problem Solving
Symptom
Possible cause
Remedy
The paper is
wrinkled.
Paper has been added to the

paper loaded.
The paper is damp.
Text is blurry.
Paper has been added to the

paper loaded.
The paper is damp.
White or color
patches appear
vertically.

damaged.

page 12-7.

out of toner.

page 12-3.
The paper cassette's paper

guides are not aligned to the
correct position.
Align the horizontal and vertical paper

guides properly.
Refer to Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4
(Optional) on page 4-6.
page 4-7.
Paper feed direction
The printout is
slanted.

User Guide
13-11
Problem Solving
Copying Problems
This section provides possible solutions to various problems you may encounter when using the Copy
features.
Unable to Copy
The table below lists possible solutions when you are unable to copy.
Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
The document is
not fed properly
through the
document
feeder.
The document size is too

small.
The minimum size of document that can be

loaded on the document feeder is A5 .
The document is not a

supported type.
The document feeder does not support

warped documents, business cards,
transparencies, thin documents,
or documents with attached stick-on notes,
paper clips or tape.
The document guides are

misaligned.
Align the document guides properly to

match the document size.
There are document shreds

stuck in the document
feeder.
Open the document feeder cover, and

remove the document shreds.
You have placed a document

containing pages of different
sizes.
You cannot place documents with different

size pages.
13-12

User Guide
Problem Solving
Copy Output Problems

The table below lists possible solutions to problems with the copy output.
Symptom
Possible cause
Remedy
Copies are dirty.
The document cover or

document glass is dirty.
Clean the document cover or document

glass.
Refer to Cleaning the Document Cover and
the Document Glass on page 12-12.
The document is a
translucent medium.
When copying highly translucent

documents, dirt on the document cover
shows up in the copy. Place a sheet of white
paper over the document before copying.
The document is on colored

or rough paper, or is a
blueprint.
The paper's background color is being

copied. Adjust the copy density or image
quality, or specify background suppression
before copying.
The document is printed on

glossy printing paper.

document glass, and shadows can resemble
dirt in the copy. Place a transparency or
transparent film under the document before
copying.
The copy density adjustment

is not right.

The document is light.

The image quality setting is

not correct for the document.
If the copy output of black text is too light,

set Original Type to Text.
Refer to Original Type on page 5-15.
The copy is
slightly out of
position.
The paper loaded in the tray

is misaligned.
Align the paper stack, and load it so that the

leading edge of the paper is aligned with the
front corners of the tray.
Copies have
missing parts in
them.
The paper is damp.
Damp paper creates missing parts or unclear

copies. Replace it with paper from an
unopened pack.
The paper in the tray is

creased or wrinkled.
Remove any problematic sheets, or replace

the paper with paper from an unopened
pack.
The document has been cutand-pasted, or is creased.

document might not be making proper
contact with the document glass. Place a
stack of white paper on top of the document
to bring it into proper contact with the
document glass.
Copies are too

dark or too light.

User Guide
13-13
Problem Solving
Symptom
Possible cause
Remedy
Striped patterns
appear in copies.
The document's
enlargement factor is too
large.
When making enlarged copies, some

enlargement factors can create striped
patterns. Adjust the copy enlargement
factor.
Refer to Reduce/Enlarge on page 5-19.
Copies are out of

position or
crooked.
You have not placed the

document correctly.

The document feeder's

document guides are
misaligned.

document guides into contact with the
edges of the document.
You have not mounted the

tray securely.
Mount the tray by inserting it securely all the

way into the machine.
The paper guides of the

Bypass tray are misaligned.

The document size is not

correct.
Check the document size set correctly.

Refer to Original Size on page 5-20.
The paper size is not correct.
Check the paper size set correctly.

Refer to Changing the Paper Settings on
page 4-11.


glass.
The document is a
translucent medium.
Place a sheet of white paper over the

document before copying.
The document has shifted

out of position.


document guides are
misaligned.

The document is creased.
Smooth out the document and place it again

correctly.
The document exceeds the

printable area.
Adjust the reduction/enlargement factor to

reduce the copy slightly.
The copy is not

the desired size.
The edges of
copies are cut
off.
13-14

User Guide
Problem Solving
Printer Problems
This section provides possible solutions to various problems you may encounter when using the Print
features.
Unable to Print
The table below lists possible solutions when you are unable to print.
Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
Data remains in the

printer icon.
The machine's power is not on.
Switch the machine's power on .

The PC's cable is disconnected.
Connect the PC's cable.
The machine's cable is

disconnected.
Connect the machine's cable.

An error has occurred in the

machine.
Check the error information, and take the required

action.
There is a problem in the

network connecting the
computer and machine.
Contact your Network Administrator.
The port is not activated.
Activate the port to use.

Refer to Activating the Communication Port To Use
on page 2-11.
The machine is connected to

multiple computers.
Wait a while, and then try printing again.
No paper has been loaded.
Load paper.
There is no paper of the

specified size.
Load paper of the specified size.

Refer to Loading Paper on page 4-5.
An error has occurred in the

machine.
Check the error information, and take the required

action.
Job execution has been paused.
Use the screen to select whether to cancel the job.
Data has been sent

to the machine.

User Guide
13-15
Problem Solving
Print Output Problems

The table below lists possible solutions to print output problems.
Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
The printout is on
the wrong paper
size.
The wrong size paper was

loaded in the specified tray.
Change the size of the paper loaded in the tray, or

change the print options to use a tray containing
the specified paper size.
The image at the

edges of the paper
is missing.
The document exceeds the

machine's printable area.
Enlarge the machine's print area, or reduce the

document's print area.
The settings
specified in the
printing options are
disabled.
The print driver of another

model machine is in use.
Install the machine's print driver.
An option has not been

mounted.
Check the options mounted in the machine, then

reselect the items in Items under Options in the
print driver.
The computer is
not using the print
driver supplied with
the machine (is
using another
company's print
driver).
Confirm whether the print driver

on the computer is the one
supplied with the machine.
On the computer, select the print driver supplied

with the machine. If the print driver is not listed for
selection, install the print driver and then select it.
Operation is not guaranteed if another company's
print driver is used.
13-16

User Guide
Problem Solving
Fax Problems
This section provides possible solutions to various problems you may encounter when using the Fax
feature.
Note The Fax features are not available for some models. An optional component is required. For more
Problems When Sending Faxes

The table below lists possible solutions when the machine cannot send a fax.
Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
The menu does not

display even after
you press the Fax
button.
The USB cable connecting the

machine to the Fax Kit has been
disconnected.
Reconnect the USB cable connecting the machine

to the Fax Kit.
Unable to
communicate
The phone line type has not

been set properly.
Set the machine's phone line type setting to the

line type you are using.
Refer to Line Type on page 9-35.
A phone line problem has

occurred.
Use a nearby phone to check whether the line is

working. If you can't make a call, the problem is
the phone line and not the machine.
The recipient fax machine

doesn't operate properly.
You can't send faxes when the recipient fax is

switched off, is set to manual receive mode, or does
not support G3 transmission.
Call the recipient to check the problem.
You have specified the wrong

number.
Check the fax number and try sending the fax

again.
The number the machine

connects to is not a fax number.
If you don't hear a fax machine when you call the

number, the number is not a fax number.
You have forgotten to add the

number required to get an
outside line.
When calling from an extension, you must add a

number at the beginning to get an outside line.
Add the number used to get an outside line (often
0) to the beginning of the fax recipient number.
You have added the number

used to get an outside line when
calling using a Speed Dial
number.
When calling from an extension to an outside

number using a Speed Dial number, the number
used to get an outside line (such as 0) may already
be registered in the Speed Dial number. Check the
recipient fax number in the Transmission Report Job Undelivered.
You are using a function that the

recipient's fax machine doesn't
support.
Check whether the recipient's fax machine

supports the function.

User Guide
13-17
Problem Solving
Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
The image quality

is poor.
The document scanning glass is

dirty.
Clean the document scanning glass.

Refer to Cleaning the Document Presser and the
Narrow Glass Strip on page 12-13.
The fax transmission density is

not correct.
Adjust the fax transmission density.

There is a problem with the

receiver.
Check on the problem with the receiver.

Note: Image quality problems can occur during fax
transmission not only due to problems with the
machine, but also due to problems with the sender
fax machine.
Problems When Receiving Faxes

The table below lists possible solutions when you are unable to receive a fax.
Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
Unable to
communicate
A phone line problem has

occurred.
Use a nearby phone to check whether the line is

working. If you can't make a call, the problem is
the phone line and not the machine.
The power is not switched on.
The machine can't receive faxes if its power is not

on. Switch the machine's power on.
Paper has not been loaded.
The machine can't print received faxes when there

is no paper loaded.
The paper has jammed.
Check the machine's control panel and remove any

jammed paper.
The machine is in System

The machine can't receive faxes when in System

Administration mode. Exit System Administration
mode.
The sender did not place the

document correctly.
Check on the problem with the sender.
13-18
Note: Fax transmission problems can occur only

due to problems with the machine, but also due to
problems with the sender fax machine.

User Guide
Problem Solving
Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
The image quality

is poor.
The drum cartridge is scratched.
Make a copy. If the image quality is poor, replace

the drum cartridge.
Refer to Replacing the Drum Cartridge on page 127.
The sender's document scanner

is dirty.
The sender has set a low

resolution.

User Guide

fax machine.

fax machine.
13-19
Problem Solving
Scan Problems
This section provides possible solutions to various problems you may encounter when using the Scan
feature.
Unable to Scan
The table below lists possible solutions when you are unable to scan.
Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
The document is not

fed properly through
the document
feeder.
The document size is too small.
The minimum size of document that can be loaded

on the document feeder is A5 .
The document is not a

supported type.
The document feeder does not support warped

documents, business cards, transparencies, thin
documents, or documents with attached stick-on
notes, paper clips or tape.
The document guides are

misaligned.
Align the document guides properly to match the

document size.
Refer to Placing a Document on page 6-1.
There are document shreds

stuck in the document feeder.
Open the document feeder cover, and remove the

document shreds.
Unable to Load Scan Data to a PC

The table below lists possible solutions when you are unable to load a scanned document to a
computer.
Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
Unable to find the

scanner.
The machine's power is not on.
Switch the machine's power on.

The PC's USB cable is

disconnected.
Reconnect the computer's disconnected USB cable.

The machine's USB cable is

disconnected.
Reconnect the machine's disconnected USB cable.

13-20

User Guide
Problem Solving
Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
Unable to load data

from the scanner
due to a TWAIN
communication
error.
The scan driver is not installed.
Install the scan driver.
Operation stopped
while loading data.
Is the file size too large?
Lower the resolution setting, and then try loading

the data again.
Unable to Send Scan Data in E-mail

Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
Unable to send an email.
The registered e-mail address is

incorrect.
Check the entered e-mail address.
The maximum data size for

outgoing e-mail was exceeded.
Lower the resolution, and reduce the size of the

attached data.
Refer to Resolution on page 7-19.
Refer to Maximum Attachment Size on page 9-33.
The port for Send E-mail is not

set to Enabled.
Check the port setting for Send E-mail.

Refer to Required Information on page 2-28.
The e-mail address for the

machine has not been
registered.
Input the Administrators e-mail address.

Refer to Administrator's E-mail Address on page 221.
The registered SMTP server

setting is incorrect.
Check the SMTP server setting.

Refer to SMTP Server (Connectivity > Protocols) on
page 2-28.
The authentication for the

SMTP server is not operated
correctly.
Check the authentication method for the SMTP

server.
page 2-28.
The registered login name for

the SMTP server is incorrect.
For the SMTP server requiring authentication, the email address of the login user must be registered.
Check the registered login name.
page 2-28.
The registered password for the

SMTP server is incorrect.
Check the registered password for the

authenticated user.
page 2-28.

User Guide
13-21
Problem Solving
Unable to Forward a Scan Document on the Network (SMB)

The table below lists possible solutions when you are unable to forward a scan document on the
network.
Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
Unable to forward
scan data to a
network computer
Has the server been entered

correctly?
Check the server setting.
Has the storage location been

entered correctly?
Check the storage location setting.
If SMB was selected, has the

shared name been entered
correctly?
Check the shared name setting.
If SMB (UNC notation) was

selected, has the storage
location been entered
correctly?
Check the storage location setting.
Has the login name been

entered correctly?
Check the login name setting.
Has the passcode been entered

correctly?
Check the passcode setting.
When forwarding data to

Windows Server 2003 or
Windows Server 2008, is the
time setting the same in the
machine and in Windows?
Set the same time in the machine and in Windows.
When using Windows Server

2003, Windows Server 2008 or
Windows XP, did a user without
a passcode attempt to forward
data using SMB?
Follow the steps below to change the network

access settings.
1.
2.
3.
13-22
Start Windows, and select Control Panel

> Administrative Tools > Local Security
Policy.
Select Security Settings > Local Policies
> Security Options.
Set Account: Limit local account use of
blank passcodes to console logon only
to Disabled.

User Guide
Problem Solving
Scan Image Quality Problems

This table below lists possible solutions to problems with the image quality of scan data.
Symptom
Possible cause
Remedy
The scanned
image is dirty.


glass.
The document is a
translucent medium.
When scanning highly translucent

documents, dirt on the document cover
shows up in the output. Place a sheet of
white paper over the document before
scanning.
The document is on colored

or rough paper, or is a
blueprint.
Adjust the scan density or image quality

before scanning.
The scanned document is

printed on glossy printing
paper.

document glass, and shadows can resemble
dirt in the scan. Place a transparency or
transparent film under the document before
scanning.
The scan density is not

properly adjusted.
Adjust the scan density.
The Original Type is

unsuitable.
Select the proper Original Type for the

document.
The document has been cutand-pasted, or is creased.

document might not be making proper
contact with the document glass. Place a
stack of white paper on top of the document
to bring it into proper contact with the
document glass.
The image is too

dark or too light.
There are
missing parts in
the image.

User Guide
13-23
Problem Solving
Symptom
Possible cause
Remedy
The image is not

the desired size.


glass.
The document is a
translucent medium.
Place a sheet of white paper over the

document before scanning.
The document has shifted

out of position.


document guides are
misaligned.

The document is creased.
Smooth out the document and place it again

correctly.
A low resolution is set.
Set a higher resolution.

The image is
grainy.
13-24

User Guide
Problem Solving
Network Related Problems

This section provides possible solutions to network problems.
Problems Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port9100)

The table below lists possible causes for problems that occur when using TCP/IP (LPD/Port9100), the
methods to check, and the required actions to take.
Unable to Print
Possible Cause
How to Check
Remedy
The correct IP address has not

been set.
Have the Network Administrator

check whether the machine's IP
address is correct.
Set the correct IP address in the

machine.
An unrecoverable failure occurred

while processing a print job.
Check whether an error is

displayed in the control panel's
display.
Turn the machine's power OFF,

wait until the display becomes
blank, and then turn the power ON
again.
The selected protocol is not

compatible with the computer
Check the selected protocol.
Select a protocol compatible with

the computer.
The data format of the print data

that the machine is attempting to
process does not match the data
format of the print data sent by
the computer.
Turn off output of Ctrl-D.

-
Print Output Problems

Possible Cause
How to Check
Remedy
The computer is not using the

print driver supplied with the
machine (is using another
company's print driver).
Confirm whether the print driver

on the computer is the one
supplied with the machine.
On the computer, select the print

driver supplied with the machine.
If the print driver is not listed for
selection, install the print driver
and then select it. Operation is not
guaranteed if another company's
print driver is used.

User Guide
13-25
Problem Solving
Problems Using Xerox CentreWare Internet Services

The table below lists possible solutions to problems you may encounter when using Xerox
Symptom
Remedy
Unable to connect to Xerox

Is the machine operating normally?

Check whether the machine's power is on.
Is Internet Services running?
Print a System Settings Report and check it.
Has the Internet address been entered correctly?
Check the Internet address again. If you still can't connect to Xerox
CentreWare Internet Services, try connecting by entering the IP
address.
Are you using a proxy server?
The machine cannot connect to some proxy servers. Do not use a proxy
server. Set your web browser Not using proxy server, or set the address
you are using to Not using proxy server.
The message "Please wait" is not

going away.
Wait for a while.

If the condition persists, press the Refresh button.
If the condition still persists, check whether the machine is operating
normally.
Nothing happens after pressing

Refresh.
Are you using a supported web browser?

See Using Xerox CentreWare Internet Services on page 2-17 to
check whether your web browser is a supported type.
The frame on the right is not

updated after selecting a menu
item from the frame on the left.
The screen display is fragmented.
Change your web browser's window size.
The display is not updated.
Press Refresh.
Nothing happens after pressing

Apply.
Are the entered values correct?

If you entered an out-of-range value, it is automatically changed to a
value within range.
Are you now using, or did you just use the machine's control panel?
When the Auto Reset feature is set, settings made by Xerox
CentreWare Internet Services are not applied until the preset amount
of time has elapsed. Wait for a while.
Is the machine in an energy saver mode?
Cancel the energy saver mode, and then try again.
13-26

User Guide
Problem Solving
Symptom
Remedy
When you click Apply, a message

such as "The server has returned
ineffective or unrecognizable
response" or "No data" is displayed
on the browser.
Is the password correct?

The password you re-entered for confirmation does not match. Enter the
password correctly.
Restart the machine.
Problems With E-mail Functions

A list is provided with possible solutions to problems you may encounter in not being able to send an email.
Symptom
Remedy
Unable to send an e-mail
Is Send E-mail set to Enabled?

Have settings such as the SMTP server's address been made correctly?
Have you entered the recipient e-mail address correctly?
Is the SMTP server working properly?
Check with your Network Administrator.
Is the system administrator's e-mail address set?
Internet/Intranet Connection Problems

The table below lists possible causes and solutions for problems that may occur when connecting to
the Internet or an intranet.

User Guide
13-27
Problem Solving
Unable to Connect to the Internet or an Intranet

Possible Cause
Remedy
The IP address has not been set

correctly.
Check the IP address setting. If the IP address has not been set
correctly, specify a fixed IP address or use DHCP or Autonet to resolve
the IP address.
The IP gateway address has not

been set correctly.
Enter the IP gateway address correctly when connecting to a proxy

server or web server via an IP gateway.
The subnet mask has not been set

correctly.
Set the subnet mask correctly, to match the environment in use.
The DNS server address has not

been set correctly.
Check the DNS server address.
The DNS server selected cannot

resolve the address.
Select a DNS server that can resolve the address.

When connecting via the proxy server
Set the IP address of a DNS server that can resolve the address of
the proxy server.
When not connecting via the proxy server
Set the IP address of a DNS server that can resolve the destination
address.
The setting of the address that

does not use a proxy server is
incorrect.
Confirm whether only addresses that do not use a proxy server are set.
Even if addresses not through a proxy server are specified using the
FQDN, if a server is directly accessed using its IP address, the registered
server is not excluded. Set the address not to use a proxy server.
Likewise, even if you directly specify an address that does not use a
proxy server, if a server is accessed with the FQDN, the registered server
is not excluded. Set an IP address with the FQDN not to use a proxy
server.
The connected server or proxy

server is down.
Check whether the server or proxy server to connect to is working

normally.
A network cable is disconnected or

broken.
Check the network cable connections. The use of a spanning tree

environment is recommended to create a network environment resistant
to disconnections.
Unable to communicate due to

the load on the server application.
Wait a while, and then access the server again.
13-28

User Guide
Problem Solving
Possible Cause
Remedy
An error has occurred but is not

displayed on the control panel.
Errors that occur while executing background processes are not

displayed on the control panel. Print the Job History Report to check the
execution results.
Unable to connect due to an

access restriction set in the proxy
server, firewall or web server.
Types of access restrictions are listed below. Check the set access
restriction.
Address (port) restriction
SSL restriction
User access (or access authority level) restriction
Content block
Scheme restriction (such as restriction on use of HTTP)
Forwarded data size restriction
Method restriction (such as restriction on use of POST)
HTTP header restriction (such as access permitted only on certain
browsers)
Time restriction (such as use permitted only during certain time
slots)
Unable to Connect to the Desired Web Server

Symptom
Remedy
The machine is not set to use a

proxy server.
If the machine is not set to use a proxy server in an environment that

uses one, you cannot connect to the desired web server. Set the machine
to use a proxy server.
The machine is set to use a proxy

server even though the
environment does not use a proxy
server.
Do not set the machine to use a proxy server in an environment not

requiring the use of the proxy server (such as an intranet).
The proxy server address has not

been set correctly.
If the machine is set to use a proxy server, you will not be able to
connect to the desired web server if the proxy server address is not set
correctly. Set the proxy server address correctly.
Unable to connect because the

user name or password is incorrect
when the proxy server requires
authentication.
Set a user name and password in the machine that the proxy server will
permit connection for.
IPv4 or IPv6 Connection Problems

The table below lists possible solutions to problems that may occur when connecting to an IPv4 or IPv6
address.

User Guide
13-29
Problem Solving
Unable to Connect to an IPv4 Address

Symptom
Remedy
When entering an IPv4 address,

the machine does not work
properly when 0 is added to the
head of values in the address, such
as 192.168.010.033
Do not add 0 to the head of address values.
Unable to Connect to an IPv6 Address

Symptom
Remedy
Unable to access the machine by

specifying a link-local address.
Append a scope ID to the link-local address.

For example, when using Internet Explorer 7 in Windows Vista to access
the machine by specifying fe80::203:baff:fe48:9010, append the
Windows Vista Ethernet adapter local area connection number (such as
8) as the scope ID (for example, enter fe80::203:baff:fe48:9010%8).
Unable to communicate with a

Windows operating system
supporting IPv6.
Set fixed addresses in Windows operating systems supporting IPv6.
Searches for devices outside the

router do not work properly.
When going outside the router in an SMB search, enter the recipient
address directly.
Multicasting is only supported within a local link (FF02::1).
Unable to Print in an IPv6 Environment

Symptom
Remedy
Unable to use a shared Windows

printer from a Windows operating
system supporting IPv6 in an IPv6
network environment without a
DNS server.
Register the machine's computer name in the "hosts" file in the

Windows operating system supporting IPv6.
Example:
Register the name in the file
C:\Windows\system32\driver\etc\hosts.
13-30

User Guide
Problem Solving
Unable to Scan in an IPv6 Environment

Symptom
Remedy
The file forwarding service fails

when only a link-local address is
assigned.
Assign a global address.
In an IPv6 network environment

without a DNS server, the file
forwarding operation fails when
you specify a computer name on
the data storage server for the
Scan to PC (Network) SMB service.
Specify an IPv6 address directly on the data storage server for the Scan
to PC (Network) SMB service.
The machine doesn't operate

correctly when using a literalformat IPv6 address to specify an
e-mail address for an e-mail
service.
Example:
csw@[ipv6:2001:db8::1]
When using an IPv6 environment, use a DNS server and specify e-mail
addresses in FQDN format.
Other IPv6 Problems

Symptom
Remedy
IPv6 addresses are not entered

correctly in output Job Logs.
Use IPv4.

User Guide
13-31
Problem Solving
Error Codes
This section describes error codes.
An error message and error code (xxx-xxx) is displayed if printing terminated abnormally because of an
error, or a malfunction occurred in the machine.
For faxing, an error code is also displayed on a Fax Activity Report and a Transmission Report - Job
Undelivered.
Refer to the error codes in the following table to resolve problems.
Note If an error code is displayed, any print data remaining in the machine and information stored in
the machine's memory is not secured.
If an error code is displayed that is not listed in the following table, or if you cannot resolve an error despite
following the instructions described in the table, contact our Customer Support Center. The contact number is
printed on the label or card attached to the machine.
Error Code
Cause
Remedy
003-500
When using the Pages per Side function, the

printout doesn't fit in the paper with the
specified reduction/enlargement factor.
Press the control panel's Stop button, and

change the setting.
003-754
An IPS error occurred.

cancel the job.
003-795
When enlarging/reducing a scanned document

to the paper size specified, the
reduction/enlargement ratio exceeds the
allowed range.

change the setting.
003-942
A document with a non-standard size is set in

the document feeder.

check the document.
003-956
A document with a non-standard size is set on

the document glass.

check the document.
003-963
When Auto is set for Paper Supply for a copy

job, the size of the scan document is larger than
the paper size that can be copied.

change the setting.
003-972
Exceeded the maximum pages that can be

scanned during a copy/scan job.
Press the control panel's Start button to

redo the operation or press the Stop button
to cancel the operation.
003-973
The image size is too large when

enlarging/reducing a scanned document that
does not match the orientation of paper.
Take one of the following measures.

Reduce the magnification with
Reduce/Enlarge.
Change the orientation of paper or
document.
13-32

User Guide
Problem Solving
Error Code
Cause
Remedy
004-345
An error occurred.
Switch off the machine power, make sure

that the display is blank, and then switch on
the machine power. If the same message is
displayed again, contact our Customer
Support Center.
005-122
005-123
005-125
005-131
005-132
005-134
005-135
005-136
005-139
005-145
005-147
005-196
005-197
005-198
005-199
A document jam occurred in the document

feeder.
Remove the jammed document.

005-210
005-275
005-280
An error occurred in the document feeder.

Support Center.
005-305
The document feeder's left cover is open.
Close the document feeder's left cover.
005-500

the machine power.
005-907
005-908
005-913
A document jam occurred in the document

feeder.
Remove the jammed document.

005-940

set the document on the document feeder
again.
005-948
A document size mismatch error occurred in the

document feeder.

cancel the job.
007-270
Tray 1 malfunction.

Support Center. You can use a tray other
than Tray 1.

User Guide
13-33
Problem Solving
Error Code
Cause
Remedy
007-272
Tray 3 malfunction.

than Tray 3.
007-273
Tray 4 malfunction.

than Tray 4.
010-311
010-312
010-320
010-327
010-379
010-392
An error occurred.

Support Center.
010-602
Temperature sensor of the machine detected

abnormality.
The machine will automatically recover

when the machine cools down. Wait for a
while, and try again.
016-346
016-372
An error occurred.

Support Center.
016-500
016-501
016-502
016-504
An error occurred.

the machine power.
016-570
A communication error occurred while printing.

cancel the job.
016-571
A communication error occurred during print

processing.
The machine will automatically recover.

Wait a moment, and try again.
016-598
The size of an e-mail page exceeds the

maximum message size because of page
splitting.

redo the operation, or press the Stop button
016-742
016-744
An error occurred.

the machine power.
016-749
An error occurred.

cancel the job.
13-34

User Guide
Problem Solving
Error Code
Cause
Remedy
016-759
A setting has been entered for the maximum

number of permitted copies, and has been
reached. Alternatively, a user who has reached
their maximum number of copies logged in.

cancel the job.
016-764
An error occurred on the network.
Press the control panel's Stop button and

cancel the job.
016-765
016-766
The SMTP server's memory area for incoming email is full.

cancel the job.
016-767
Unable to send the e-mail because the address

is not correct

cancel the job.
016-768
E-mail data creation failed.

cancel the job.
016-776
A job is canceled.

cancel the job.
016-781
Unable to resolve the SMTP server name when

sending an e-mail.

cancel the job.
016-791
The machine could not send data when

executing the Scan to PC (Network) or Scan to
E-mail function.

cancel the job.
016-799
An invalid print parameter is included in the

print data of the application, or the print data
and the Print Setup settings may not match.

cancel the job.
016-981
The EPC memory is full.

016-982
The memory is full while scanning the first page

with Scan to PC service.

cancel the job.
016-985
The attachment size using the Scan to E-mail

service exceeds the maximum size.

017-745
Exceeded the maximum storage size using SMB

of the Scan to PC service.

024-910
The paper size set for Tray 1 and the paper size
specified for the job are not the same.
Press the control panel's Stop button to

cancel the job or change the paper to the
specified paper size.
024-911


User Guide
13-35
Problem Solving
Error Code
Cause
Remedy
024-912

024-913

024-915
The paper size set for Tray 5 (bypass) and the

paper size specified for the job are not the
same.
Reload paper to match the paper setting or

press the control panel's Stop button.
024-950
There is no paper in Tray 1 and another tray

cannot be selected.
Load more paper, or press the control

panel's Stop button to cancel the job.
024-951

cannot be selected.

024-952

cannot be selected.

024-953

cannot be selected.

024-954

cannot be selected.

024-958
The paper setting specified in the control panel

does not match the size or type of paper loaded
in the Tray 5 (bypass).
Reload paper to match the paper setting or

press the control panel's Stop button.
024-959
Tray 1 has not been inserted or the paper

guides are in an unsupported position.

insert Tray 1, or check the position of the
paper guides.
024-960


paper guides.
024-961


paper guides.
024-962


paper guides.
024-965
The paper specified for the job is not loaded

into any of the trays.
Load the specified paper, or press the

control panel's Stop button to cancel the
job.
024-966
Attempted to select a tray automatically

although all trays except the Tray 5 (bypass) are
not selectable for auto selection.

try again.
13-36

User Guide
Problem Solving
Error Code
Cause
Remedy
024-718
Incompatible print parameters are used. The

combination of the specified features such as
Document Size, Paper Size, Paper Tray, 2 sided
printing, and Output Tray is incompatible.
Confirm the print data, and try printing

again.
026-737
A network error occurred.
Consult your network administrator whether

the network or the server has any problem.
027-518
Failed to login the forwarding destination.

cancel the job.
027-520
Invalid characters are used or the specified path

is not found.

cancel the job.
027-522
Unable to write in the forwarding destination.

cancel the job.
027-528
Data could not be written to the shared folder

because the computers hard disk is full.

delete any unneeded data to create room
on the hard disk.
027-543
The SMB server (NetBIOS) name is invalid.
Check whether the server name of the SMB

server is correct, or press the control panel's
Stop button to cancel the job.
027-779
Failed to authenticate the SMTP server.

cancel the job.
033-313
033-316
An error occurred while sending a fax.

check the settings.
033-325
An error occurred.

that the touch screen is blank, and then
switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our
033-326
The sender for the Scan to E-mail function has

not been entered.

check the settings.
033-503
033-504
033-505
033-506
033-507
033-509
033-510
033-517
033-526
033-529
033-531
033-532
An error occurred during fax transmission.

Wait for a while, and try again.

User Guide
13-37
Problem Solving
Error Code
Cause
Remedy
033-541
The recipient of the specified number is not

registered.
Specify the recipient correctly, or press the

control panel's Stop button, and cancel the
job.
033-547
Communication was terminated by a cause

such as pressing the Stop button.

try again.
033-548
Cannot transmit manually because a line is

unavailable.

cancel the job.
033-549
Cannot use the Fax service because of causes

such as memory is insufficient a fax in the
queue.

033-550
033-567
Unable to register in the Address Book.

033-572
The data received is not printed.

033-577
033-578

033-712
Unable to process because of insufficient

memory.
Delete unnecessary data. If the same

message is displayed again, contact our
033-725
The hard disk is full.

033-753

cancel the job.
034-522
Cannot transmit manually because a line is

unavailable.
Confirm the completion of the job, or press

the control panel's Stop button, and cancel
the job.
034-550

Support Center.
034-711

034-726
Exceeded the limit of jobs.

034-746
The line is not connected correctly.

cancel the job.
034-752
The recipient`s line is busy.

cancel the job.
13-38

User Guide
Problem Solving
Error Code
Cause
Remedy
034-757

034-761
034-765
The recipient in the Address Book is incorrect.
Confirm the recipient`s address, and try

again. If the same message is displayed
again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
035-550

the machine power.
035-703

035-704
An error occurred while sending a fax.

035-708
035-728
035-741
035-748
035-758
035-759
An error occurred while sending a fax during fax

transmission.

Wait a moment, and try again.
035-761

Support Center.
036-506

036-550

the machine power.
036-700

036-740

cancel the job.
036-777
036-796

Wait for a while and try again.
041-210
041-211
An error occurred in Tray 1.

Support Center.

User Guide
13-39
Problem Solving
Error Code
Cause
Remedy
042-325
An error occurred.

Support Center.
042-400
The odor filter life is over.
042-608
042-614
The Voc filer life is over.
042-614
An error occurred.

the machine power.
045-310
An error occurred.
Removed the jammed paper.

045-313
045-218
061-321
061-325
An error occurred.

Support Center.
062-277

Support Center.
062-300
The cover was open when a document was

placed in the document feeder.
Close the cover.
062-311
An error occurred.

Support Center.
062-360
062-371
062-380
062-386
062-389
062-396
An error occurred.

Support Center.
071-105
An error occurred in the left cover A or Tray 1.
Remove the jammed paper.

072-102
An error occurred in the one tray module cover B

or Tray 2.

13-40

User Guide
Problem Solving
Error Code
Cause
Remedy
072-105
A paper jam occurred in the one tray module

cover B.

072-210
072-212
072-215
An error occurred in Tray 2 (One Tray Module).

Support Center.
073-102
A paper jam occurred in the two tray module

cover C or Tray 3.

073-104

cover B or the two tray module cover C.

073-105

cover B.

073-210
An error occurred in Tray 3 (Two Tray Module).

Support Center.
074-101
074-102

cover C or Tray 4.

074-104

cover B or the two tray module cover C.

074-105

cover B.

074-210
An error occurred in Tray 4 (Two Tray Module).

Support Center.
075-135
077-101
077-103
077-104
077-106
A paper jam occurred in the left cover A.

077-129

077-211
An error occurred in the Two Tray Module.

Support Center.

User Guide
13-41
Problem Solving
Error Code
Cause
Remedy
077-212
An error occurred in the One Tray Module.

Support Center.
077-300
The front cover is open.
Close the front cover.
077-301
The left cover A is open.
Close the left cover A.
077-305
The two tray module cover C is open.
Close the two tray module cover C.
077-309
The one tray module cover B is open.
Close the one tray module cover B.
077-900
077-901

077-904

cover B.

077-905
077-906

cover B or C.

091-313
An error occurred.

Support Center.
091-401
The drum cartridge needs to be replaced.
Replace the drum cartridge. Call the

Customer Support Center to order
replacement consumables/periodic
replacement parts. Have product codes
ready.
page 12-7.
091-402
The drum cartridge needs to be replaced.

ready.
page 12-7.
091-406
The drum cartridge life is over.

ready.
page 12-7.
13-42

User Guide
Problem Solving
Error Code
Cause
Remedy
091-424

ready.
page 12-7.
091-430

ready.
page 12-7.
091-440
The drum cartridge needs to be replaced soon.

ready.
page 12-7.
091-441
The drum cartridge needs to be replaced soon.
Prepare a drum cartridge. Call the Customer

Support Center to order replacement
consumables/periodic replacement parts.
Have product codes ready.
page 12-7.
091-914
091-915
091-916
An error occurred with the drum cartridge.

Support Center.
091-921

Support Center.
092-660
A drum cartridge error occurred.

the machine power.
092-661
Temperature SNR (in CRU) value is out of range.

the machine power.

User Guide
13-43
Problem Solving
Error Code
Cause
Remedy
092-668
ATC SNR (in drum cartridge) value is out of

range.

the machine power.
092-910
An error occurred.

the machine power.
093-312
An error occurred with the toner cartridge.

Support Center.
093-400
There is no more toner in the toner cartridge.
Replace the toner cartridge.
093-406
The toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon.
Prepare a new toner cartridge.
093-912
There is no more toner in the toner cartridge.
Replace the toner cartridge.
093-956
An error occured with the drum cartridge.
Remove the tape from the drum cartridge.

page 12-7.
093-959

ready.
page 12-7.
116-321
116-323
116-324
116-334
116-377
An error occurred.

Support Center.
116-386
The fax cable is not connected correctly.
Connect the cable securely, and then switch

off the machine power, make sure that the
display is blank, and then switch on the
machine power. If the same message is
Support Center.
116-747
Unable to complete scanning due to the

scanning area being too small.
Decrease the value of the Edge Erase or

reduce the zoom ratio.
117-326
117-327
123-314
An error occurred.

Support Center.
13-44

User Guide
Problem Solving
Error Code
Cause
Remedy
127-396
Failed to create an e-mail data.

try again.
133-226
The specified country code is not supported by

the machine or the time is not set.
Set the country code or time again.

Refer to Region on page 9-38 and Clock on
page 9-43.
134-210
134-211
Connect the cable securely, and then switch

off the machine power, make sure that the
display is blank, and then switch on the
machine power. If the same message is
Support Center.

User Guide
13-45
Problem Solving
Paper Jams
This section describes procedures to clear paper jams.
When paper jams in the machine, the machine stops and an alarm sounds. A message is also displays
on the screen.
Carefully remove the jammed paper without tearing it. Do not leave any pieces of paper in the
machine.
Notes
If the paper jam message remains displayed after you have cleared it, paper is jammed in another
part of the machine. Follow the instructions in the message to take the required action.
After removing the jammed paper, a copy job resumes automatically.
A print job resumes automatically from the page being printed just before the paper jam occurred.
While running a copy job using the document feeder without collating the copied output
(meaning that the document feeder feeds and scans the documents one sheet at a time), if a
paper jam occurs on the machine, the machine resumes to make a copy of the already-scanned
document automatically after removing the jammed paper. However, as for the remaining
document, you must press the Start button again to allow the document feeder to feed and scan
the rest of the loaded documents.
WARNING: If you need to pull out a tray to remove paper jam, contact your local Xerox
representative. Do not pull out a tray, otherwise it may cause injuries.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to remove a paper deeply jammed inside the product, particularly a
paper wrapped around the fusing unit or the heat roller. Otherwise, it may cause Injuries or burns.
Switch off the product immediately and contact your local Xerox representative.
13-46

User Guide
Problem Solving
Error
Code
Message
Area to Check/
Check Procedure
See Page:
071-105
Paper Jam in Tray 1

Check Tray 1.
Open Cover A and remove paper.
1. Left cover A
2. Tray 1
P. 13-49
P. 13-53
072-102
Paper Jam in Tray 2

Check Tray 2.
Open Cover B and remove paper.
1. One tray module cover B

2. Tray 2
P. 13-51
P. 13-53
072-105
Paper Jam at Cover B

P. 13-51
073-102
Paper Jam in Tray 3

Check Tray 3.
Open Cover C and remove paper.
1. Two tray module cover C

2. Tray 3
P. 13-52
P. 13-53
073-104
Paper Jam at Covers B and C

Open Cover B and Cover C, and remove
paper.

P. 13-51
P. 13-52
073-105

P. 13-51
074-101
074-102
Paper Jam in Tray 4

Check Tray 4.
Open Cover C and remove paper.

2. Tray 4
P. 13-52
P. 13-53
074-104
Paper Jam at Covers B and C

paper.

P. 13-51
P. 13-52
074-105

P. 13-51
075-135
Paper Jam in Tray 5

Remove paper from Tray 5 and remove
paper.
1. Left cover A
2. Tray 5
P. 13-49
P. 13-54

User Guide
13-47
Problem Solving
Error
Code
Message
Area to Check/
Check Procedure
See Page:
Left cover A
P. 13-49
077-101
Paper Jam at Cover A

077-103
077-104
077-106
Paper Jam
077-129
Paper Jam at Duplex Module

Open Cover A, and remove paper.
077-900
Paper Jam at Cover A

077-901
Paper Jam
077-904

P. 13-51
077-905
077-906
Paper Jam at Cover B and C

paper.

P. 13-51
P. 13-52
Notes
Pulling out a tray after a paper jam without checking where the jam is located may cause the
paper to tear and leave shreds inside the machine. To prevent equipment failure, check the
location of paper jams before attempting to clear them.
The paper jam display will not go out if paper shreds remain in the machine.
When clearing paper jams, leave the machine's power on. Switching the power off erases
information stored in the machine's memory.
Do not touch parts inside the machine. Printing errors may result.
13-48

User Guide
Problem Solving
Paper Jam in Left Cover A

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams inside the machine's left cover.
Note When removing paper, there may be an image on the machine's Transfer Belt (the black film
belt) inside the left cover. Do not touch the Transfer Belt. Image quality could be affected, or the
Transfer Belt could be damaged and need replacement.
1.
Open Tray 5 (1), and then while lifting up the release lever (2) gently open the left cover (3).
If the paper is jammed around the fusing unit

a. Pull down the latch.
b.
Note Do not leave any torn pieces of paper inside the machine.
c.
Return the latch back to its position.

User Guide
13-49
Problem Solving
d.
Push on the center of the left cover, close it slowly, and raise the Tray 5 (bypass).
If the paper is jammed within the left cover

a. If the paper is jammed in the location shown in the diagram, remove the jammed paper
pulling upwards.
b.
If the paper is jammed in the location shown in the diagram, remove the jammed paper
pulling upwards.
c.
Push on the center of the left cover, close it slowly, and raise Tray 5 (bypass).
13-50

User Guide
Problem Solving
Paper Jam in One Tray Module Cover B

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams inside the machine's one tray module cover.
1. Pull the release lever, and slowly open the one tray module cover.
2.
Notes
The paper may be jammed in the upper part where it is difficult to see. Check thoroughly for
jammed paper.
If the paper tears, check to make sure there are no remaining shreds in the machine.
3. Close the one tray module cover gently.

User Guide
13-51
Problem Solving
Paper Jam in Two Tray Module Cover C

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams inside the machine's two tray module cover.
1. Pull the release lever, and slowly open the two tray module cover.
2.

Notes
The paper may be jammed in the upper part where it is difficult to see. Check thoroughly for
jammed paper.
3.
Close the two tray module cover gently.
13-52

User Guide
Problem Solving
Paper Jams in Tray 1 to 4

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in Tray 1 to 4.
1. Remove the jammed paper by referring to the following:
Tray 1: Paper Jam in Left Cover A on page 13-49.
Tray 2 (optional): Paper Jam in One Tray Module Cover B on page 13-51
Tray 3 to 4 (optional): Paper Jam in Two Tray Module Cover C on page 13-52
2. If the jammed paper cannot be removed, pull out the tray.
Note Pulling out a tray after a paper jam without checking where the jam is located may cause the
paper to tear and leave shreds inside the machine. To prevent equipment failure, check the location of
paper jams on the display before attempting to clear them.
3.
Note If the paper tears, check to make sure there are no remaining shreds in the machine.
4.
Push the tray in gently until it stops.

User Guide
13-53
Problem Solving
Paper Jams in the Tray 5 (Bypass)

Follow the steps below to clear a paper jam in Tray 5 (bypass).
1. Inspect the inside (around the paper feed entrance) of the Tray 5 (bypass), and remove the
jammed paper.
Notes
If multiple sheets of paper were loaded, remove all the paper while you clear the jam.
2.
3.
If multiple sheets of paper were loaded, align the corners of the removed paper.
Insert the paper with the side to print on facing down, aligning it so that its leading edge lightly
contacts the paper feed entrance.
13-54

User Guide
Problem Solving
Document Jams
When a document jam occurred in the document feeder, the machine stops and an alarm beeps. A
message is also displayed on the screen.
Note The document feeder does not come as standard on some machine configurations.
Error Code
Message
005-122
005-123
005-125
005-131
005-132
005-134
005-135
005-136
005-139
005-145
005-147
005-196
005-198
005-199
005-907
005-908
005-913
Document Feeder Jam

Open Document Feeder Cover and remove paper.
005-197
Unavailable Original Size

Open Document Feeder Cover and remove paper.
Follow the steps below to remove the jammed document.

1. Pull up the front handle of the document feeder cover, and open the document feeder cover
completely.
Note The cover will remain fixed in position when fully opened. Open the cover slowly.

User Guide
13-55
Problem Solving
2.
If the document has not yet been fed into the feeder, remove it.
3.
If you cannot find the document, lift up the handle to open the inner cover.
Handle
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Close the document feeder's inner cover.

Close the document feeder cover until it clicks into place, and confirm that there is no space
between the near or far side of the cover and the document feeder.
If you cannot find the document, carefully lift up the document feeder. If you find the document,
remove it, then close the document feeder.
If you cannot find the document in Step 6, lift up the document feeder tray and remove the
document.
Carefully move the document feeder tray back into position.
13-56

User Guide
Problem Solving
9.
Make sure that the document is not torn, wrinkled, or folded, and then reload the documents to
complete the job.
After removing the jammed document:

Copy
Place the unscanned document again including the jammed pages.
Scan (E-mail/PC (Network))
Place the entire document again.
If the scanned data is already sent, place the unscanned document again including the jammed
pages.
Scan (TWAIN/WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition))
Place the unscanned document again including the jammed pages.
Fax
Place the entire document again.
If the Immediate Fax Switch is set to transmit immediately, place the unscanned document again
including the jammed pages.
Note Torn, wrinkled or folded document pages can cause document jams or damage. Always copy
torn, wrinkled or folded documents by placing them directly on the document glass.

User Guide
13-57
Problem Solving
13-58

User Guide
Appendix
14
This chapter describes the machine specifications, optional components, and notes and restrictions.
Specifications
This section lists the main specifications of the machine. Note that the specifications and the
appearance of the product may change without prior notice.

User Guide
14-1
Appendix
Basic Functions/Copy Functions

Type
Desktop
Memory
256 MB
Scanning Resolution
600 600 dpi
Hard Disk
Printing Resolution
600 600 dpi
Halftone
256 shades of gray scales
Warm-up Time
19 seconds or less
Note: At room temperature, 20C
Original Paper Size
The maximum size is 297 432 mm (A3, 11 17") for both sheets and books.
Image loss width: 5.5 mm max. at top, right, and left; 6.0 mm max. at bottom
Output Paper Size
Maximum: A3, 11 17"

Minimum: Tray 1: A5
Tray 2 to 4: A5
Tray 5 (bypass): A5
Output Paper Weight
Tray 1 (standard):
Tray 2 to 4 (optional):
Tray 5 (bypass):
60 - 90 gsm
60 - 216 gsm
60 - 216 gsm
Note: Use paper recommended by Xerox. Copying may not be performed

correctly depending on the conditions.
First Copy Output Time
Document glass: 7.2 sec. or less (A4

Document feeder: 11 sec. or less (A4
Reduction/Enlargement
14-2
)
)
Size-for-Size 1:1 0.8%

Preset %
1:0.500, 1:0.707, 1:0.816, 1:0.866, 1:1.154, 1:1.225, 1:1.414
1:2.000
Variable % 1:0.25 - 1:4.000% (1% increments)

User Guide
Appendix
Type
Desktop
Continuous Copy Speed
WorkCentre 5024
Paper Trays 1 to 4:
Continuous 1 Sided copy/same magnification
A4 , B5 :
A4:
A3, B4, B5:
Paper Trays 1 to 4:
24 sheets/minute
15 sheets/minute
12 sheets/minute
A4 , B5
A4:
B5:
B4:
A3:
17 sheets/minute
8.7 sheets/minute
7.2 pages/minute
7.9 sheets/minute
8.6 sheets/minute
WorkCentre 5022
Paper Trays 1 to 4:
A4 , B5 :
A4:
A3, B4, B5:
Paper Trays 1 to 4:
22 sheets/minute
15 sheets/minute
12 sheets/minute
A4 , B5
A4:
B5:
B4:
A3:
16 sheets/minute
8.7 sheets/minute
7.2 pages/minute
7.9 sheets/minute
8.6 sheets/minute
Notes
Paper Tray Capacity
The speed may be reduced due to image quality adjustment.

These are the speeds used for Bond, Plain, and Recycled paper. Print
performance can be varied depending on the type of paper used.
The speed of the first set for 2 sided copy with the document feeder maybe
reduced to 13 pages/minute.
Standard: 350 sheets (Tray 1 (250 sheets *1) + Tray 5 (bypass) (100 sheets *2)
500 sheets *1 (One Tray Module) and 1,000 sheets *1
(Two Tray Module)
Maximum: 1,850 sheets (Standard + One Tray Module + Two Tray Module)
Optional:
*1 When using 80 gsm paper

*2 When using Xerox standard paper
Continuous Copy
999 sheets
Output Tray Capacity
250 sheets (A4)

Note: When using 80 gsm paper
Power Supply
AC 220 - 240 V 10%, 6A, 50/60 Hz 3%

User Guide
14-3
Appendix
Type
Desktop
Power Consumption
1.0 kW or less
Sleep mode: 2.3 W or less
Dimensions
Width 595 mm Depth 573 mm x Height 580 mm (with document feeder)
Machine Weight
37 kg (with document feeder)

Note: Toner cartridge is not included.
Space Requirement
Width 947 mm Depth 573 mm (with document feeder)

Note: When Tray 5 (bypass) is fully extended.
14-4

User Guide
Appendix
Print Functions
Type
Built-in
Output Paper Size
Same as the Basic Functions/Copy Functions
Continuous Print Speed

Note: The speed may be reduced due to image quality adjustment. Print speed
may also drop depending on the document.
Print Resolution
Output resolution:
600 600 dpi
Data processing resolution: 600 600 dpi
PDL
Standard: FX HBPL (Host Based Print Language)

Optional: PCL
Protocol
Network connection: TCP/IP v4/v6 (lpd, Port9100)
Operating System
Microsoft Windows XP
Microsoft Windows Server 2003
Microsoft Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition
Microsoft Windows Vista
Microsoft Windows Vista x64
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
Microsoft Windows 7
Microsoft Windows 7 x64
Microsoft Windows 8
For information about the latest supported OS, refer to the Xerox Web site.
Connectivity
Standard: USB 1.1/2.0, TWAIN, Optional: Ethernet 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
Scan Functions (Local)*1

Type
Color Scanner
Original Paper Size
Scanning Resolution
Monochrome:
Color:

User Guide
600 600 dpi, 400 400 dpi,

300 300 dpi, 200 200 dpi
300 300 dpi, 200 200 dpi,
14-5
Appendix
Type
Color Scanner
Scanning Halftone
Color:
Monochrome:
8-bit input / 8-bit output for each RGB color

1-bit output
Scanning Speed*2
Monochrome:
Color:
18 sheets/minute
4 sheets/minute
With a standard Xerox document (A4 ), at 200 dpi, using TWAIN driver (USB)
Scan to PC
(TWAIN/
WIA*3: USB)
Driver
TWAIN/WIA*3
Operating
Systems*4
Microsoft Windows 7
Microsoft Windows 8 x64,
Microsoft Windows 8,
*1
The Local scan function is installed as standard in CPS and CPS NW model.
The scanning speed varies depending on documents.
*3
WIA stands for Windows Imaging Acquisition.
*4 Please refer to the Xerox web site for the latest support operating systems.
*2
14-6

User Guide
Appendix
Scan Functions (Network)*1 (Optional)

Type
Color Scanner
Original Paper Size
Same as the Copy Functions.
Scanning Resolution
Monochrome:
Color:
600 600 dpi, 400 400 dpi,

300 300 dpi, 200 200 dpi
300 300 dpi, 200 200 dpi,
Scanning Halftone
Color:
Monochrome:
8-bit input / 8-bit output for each RGB color

1-bit output
Scanning Speed*2
Monochrome:
Color:
18 sheets/minute
4 sheets/minute
With a standard Xerox document (A4 ), at 200 dpi, using TWAIN driver (USB)
Connectivity
Scan to PC
(Network:
Push
Scanning)
Standard: Ethernet 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T

Protocol
TCP/IP (SMB)
Operating
Systems
Microsoft Windows 7
Microsoft Windows 8
Scan to e-mail
*1
*2
File
Format
Monochrome binary: PDF / TIFF (Multi-Page)

Color:
PDF (Multi-Page) / JPEG
Protocol
TCP/IP (SMTP Authentication)
File
Format
Monochrome binary: PDF / TIFF (Multi-Page)

Color:
PDF (Multi-Page) / JPEG
The network scan function is only available with the network option.
The scanning speed varies depending on documents.

User Guide
14-7
Appendix
Fax Functions (Optional)

Send Document Size
Maximum: A3
Recording Paper Size
Maximum: A3
Minimum: A4
Transmission Time
3-second range
Note: When transmitting an A4 size 700-character document in the standard
quality (8 3.85 lines/mm) and high speed mode (28.8 kbps or above: JBIG). This is
only the transmission speed for image information and does not include the
controlling time for the communication. Note that the actual transmission time
depends on the content of documents, the machine that the recipient uses, and the
status of the communication line.
Transmission Mode
Super G3/G3 ECM/G3 (ITU-T)
Scanning Resolution
Standard:
Coding Methods
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Transmission Speed
G3: 33.6/31.2/28.8/26.4/24.0/21.6/19.2/16.8/14.4/12.0/9.6/7.2/4.8/2.4 kbps
No. of Fax Lines
PSTN/PBX
8 3.85 lines/mm
200 100 dpi (7.9 3.9 dots/mm)
Fine:
8 7.7 lines/mm
200 200 dpi (7.9 7.9 dots/mm)
Super-fine (400 dpi): 16 15.4 lines/mm
400 400 dpi (15.7 15.7 dots/mm)
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (Optional)

Type
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder
Original Paper Size
Maximum: A3, 11 17"

Minimum: A5
38 - 128 gsm (2 Sided: 50 - 128 gsm)
Capacity
110 sheets
Note: When using 80 gsm paper
Feeding Speed
WorkCentre 5024
24 sheets/minute (A4 , 1 Sided)
13 pages/minute (A4 , 2 Sided)
WorkCentre 5022
22 sheets/minute (A4 , 1 Sided)
13 pages/minute (A4 , 2 Sided)
Dimensions/Weight
14-8
Width 540 Depth 492 Height 115 mm, 7 kg

User Guide
Appendix
Duplex Output Unit (Optional)

Paper Size
Maximum: A3, 11 17"

Minimum:
Paper Weight
A5, B5
60 - 90 gsm
Note: Use the bypass tray when using 91 - 110 gsm paper.
One Tray Module (Optional)

Paper Size
Paper Weight
500 sheets x 1 tray

Note: When using 80 gsm paper.
Dimensions/
Weight
Two Tray Module (Optional)

Paper Size
Paper Weight
500 sheets x 2 trays

Note: When using 80 gsm paper.
Dimensions/
Weight

User Guide
14-9
Appendix
Printable Area
The standard printable area is the area of the page within 4.0 mm from the top, bottom, left and right
edges of the paper. The actual printable area may vary depending on the printer (plotter) and control
language.
4 mm
Unprintable area
4 mm
Paper
feed direction
14-10
Printable area/
Guaranteed
print area
4 mm
4 mm

User Guide
Appendix
Optional Components
The following table shows the optional components available. To purchase these options, contact our
Product Name
Description
Network Kit
A kit for using this machine in a network environment.
Network Kit (PCL)
A kit for using this machine in a network environment.

Enables you to print with PCL.
Fax Kit
Adds the Fax feature to the machine.
One Tray Module
A tray that can load 500 sheets of paper (when using 80 gsm
paper).
Two Tray Module
A set of two trays that can load 500 sheets of paper per tray.
(when using 80 gsm paper). This module is available only when
the One Tray Module is installed.
Stand
A special stand used to mount the machine on the floor. Contains

storage space for paper. This stand is available when the One
Tray Module is installed.
Tray Lock
Locks the trays on the machine.
Notes
The optional components are subject to change without notice.
For the latest information, contact our Customer Support Center.

User Guide
14-11
Appendix
Notes and Restrictions

This section describes the notes and restrictions to observe when using the machine.
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine

Notes on Switching Off the Power
After the power is switched off, the machine performs internal power off processes for a while. After
turning the power off, turning it on again before the screen display has disappeared will not start the
machine right away. Before turning the power on, check that the operation screen display has
disappeared.
Installing and Moving the Machine
Contact our Customer Support Center or a Customer Engineer before moving the machine.
Do not subject the machine to shocks while it is in operation.
Take care not to get fingers caught when closing the document cover.
Do not place objects near fan intakes on the machine's outer casing.
Character Codes
In data transmission from a computer, if characters that the machine does not support are included in
the file names, these characters may not be displayed correctly. Only ASCII characters can be used.
Hard Disk
You cannot install a hard disk into this product.
Job History Report
If the output file name includes characters other than alphanumeric, it is not displayed correctly on the
Job History Report.
Printing Results
The sort feature to change the paper orientation for each set causes a decrease in productivity
relative to the ordinary sort.
Depending on the type of used media, rubber roller marks may be left behind along the scanning
direction or toner wax components adhere to the paper during 2 Sided printing or when the
output destination is changed during continuous printing.
Droplets of water may adhere to the printing paper immediately after the power is turned on to
the machine.
Depending on the type of used media, pinch roller marks and minute scratches may form in the
scanning direction.
Line unevenness may occur along the scanning direction in high-volume printing in low-humidity
environments.
14-12

User Guide
Appendix
Colors may appear muted on the underside of high-density images in printing in low-temperature,
low-humidity environments.
Small white spots may appear within images on the back side of the paper in printing in lowhumidity environments.
Document Feeder
The machine does not detect a document placed in the document feeder during Sleep mode.
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Copy Feature

Copy Feature
The machine does not offer the Improves Fit function.
ID Card Copy
The front and back side of the placed ID card are printed on each half sheet of a paper in center except
the following cases:
When the size of the ID card is larger than the standard printable size of the ID Card Copy feature,
the image is not printed in center.
When the size of ID card is larger than the standard printable size of the ID Card Copy feature, a
part of the image may be cut off.
The edges of the ID card may be cut off due to the edge erase.
About Memory
If the machines memory capacity becomes insufficient when copying using the collate feature, it
outputs only the document data which is being scanned.
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Print Feature

Output of Long Feed Documents
The output of long feed documents is not supported.
Print Jobs while the Control Panel is being Operated
The processing print job or output speed may be reduced in the following cases:
When the control panel is operated during print job execution
When the print job's status is displayed in the Job Status screen
Even if the print driver is configured to skip blank pages, the blank pages with white characters,
newline characters and space characters will be printed.
When the print results differ from the settings
As in the following cases, insufficient memory for the print page buffer may cause print result in not
printing as specified.

User Guide
14-13
Appendix
A 2-sided print job is printed on one side.

A job was terminated (if data cannot be written to the print page buffer, the job including that
page, is terminated).
Meter Counts for 2 Sided Printing

When printing a 2 sided print job, depending on the application being used, blank sheets can be
inserted automatically to adjust pages. These blank sheets inserted by the application also are counted
by the meter.
Automatic Cancellation of Print Jobs
A job is canceled if a malfunction occurred in the machine or the selected tray that is not installed.
2-Sided Printing
When performing 2-sided printing on a machine on which the duplex output unit is not installed,
printing only occurs on one side. In this case, print orientation may not be as expected.
Memory Full Errors
A File System Full or similar error will appear during attempts to send print data at volumes
exceeding 30 MB per job using the LPD protocol and printing will be disabled. If this occurs,
change the protocol in the Port Settings of the printer driver to Port9100 (RAW DATA Socket), or
break the job into different sections before printing.
If the machine stops due to an error caused by the machine running out of paper, the cover on the
machine being open, or some other issue, the last job will be canceled while in progress if an
attempt is made to send continuous print job data exceeding 30 MB total, even with local printing
via USB or printing using the Port9100 protocol. (Jobs for files that are stored during printing will
resume printing once the error has been resolved and removed.) To restart printing for the last job
that was canceled, first remove the write error message displayed on the client computer side
before attempting to execute the print job again.
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Scan Feature

This section describes notes and restrictions to observe when using the Scan feature.
For the notes and restrictions on the scan driver, see the "Readme" information on the CD-ROM for the
Driver CD Kit that came with the machine.
Restriction on Scanning Capacity
The maximum scanning capacity for one page is 297 432 mm. For standard sizes, A3 or 11 17
inches.
Network Reference on SMB Environment
If you configure more than 256 shared resources other than shared folders (such as shared
printers) shared resources other than shared folders may be displayed in the shared folder list.
Network settings (such as the workgroup names, server names and shared names) displayed in
lists may not be displayed alphabetically.
14-14

User Guide
Appendix
If the registered destination of SMB is incorrect, the job does not end by pressing the Stop button
after proceeded to the transmission movement. The job ends when the error code "026-737"
appears.
Compression Format of Scanned Images

The compression formats for Scan to PC (Network) and Scan to E-mail are PDF or TIFF format for
monochrome images and PDF or JPEG format for color images.
E-mail Authentication
The E-mail feature supports SMTP Authentication only.
E-mail Recipient Specification
The E-mail feature does not support specification of multiple recipients.
Simultaneous Use of PC-compatible (USB) and Windows Imaging Acquisition (WIA)-compatible
Applications
If you attempt to execute a Windows Imaging Acquisition (WIA)-compatible application while the
Button Manager is running, a message may appear stating that scan to PC could not be performed. To
restart and try again, close the Windows Imaging Acquisition (WIA)-compatible application.
Address Book
When registering addresses using Xerox CentreWare Internet Services, we recommend using
an Ethernet crossover cable to connect the machine to your computer to protect your e-mail
address might be intercepted on the network since the machine does not support SSL.
2-byte UTF-8 is supported for the Server Path and the Share Name of the SMB server, and names
to be registered in the address book. However, the languages except Korean and Simplified
Chinese cannot be displayed on the machines display.
Canceling the Scan Job

It may be impossible to stop the job by pressing the Stop button during the transmission by Scan
(SMB/Email), for example when the network cable is unplugged or when the transmission has already
been completed.
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Fax Feature

Fax Communication Environment
The machine does not support G4 or G3 communication on ISDN lines.
Relay Broadcast Function
The machine does not have relay station functions or repeater station functions.

User Guide
14-15
Appendix
Notes and Restrictions when Connecting to Internet or Intranet

Internet/Intranet Connections
Depending on the web server, server application, proxy server, and firewall, you may not be able to
connect to the Internet or intranet.
To connect to the Internet or intranet using a third party server application, proxy, or firewall, the
following requirements must be met:
The software must run on Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, Windows
Server 2008 R2, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, or Windows Server 2012.
RFC2617: HTTP Authentication: Basic and Digest Access Authentication must be satisfied. (only
Basic authentication is supported, the other authentications are not supported)
Supporting the GET/CONNECT/POST methods
Xerox CentreWare Internet Services
Depending on the browser settings, text for language selection may not be displayed correctly.
If the language selection on Xerox CentreWare Internet Services differs from the language
setting specified in the machine, texts entered on Xerox CentreWare Internet Services are not
displayed correctly on the machine. It is required to match the both language settings.
The tabs may not be displayed correctly when there are several browsers to access to Xerox
CentreWare Internet Services at the same time or condition of the network. In this case, refresh
the display.
The maximum login number configured on Xerox CentreWare Internet Services differs from
the actual permitted number of authentication failure accessed via Internet Explorer. It does not
occur on Firefox and Google Chrome.
Notes and Restrictions when Operating from Computers

Supported OS
The supported OS may vary depending on the functions. For more information, refer to Specifications
on page 14-1.
For information about the latest supported OS, refer to the Xerox Web site.
Notes and Restrictions for Using SMB

This section describes notes and restrictions to observe when using SMB.
Configuration on the Machine
IP addresses are managed for the entire system. Configure the settings only after consulting your
network administrator.
The setting of subnet mask and gateway addresses may be required depending on the network
environment. Consult your network administrator and configure the required settings.
14-16

User Guide
Appendix
Configuration on the Computer

When setting the network such as IP addresses with a host used under the Network Information
Service (NIS), consult your NIS administrator.
SMB Authentication
When an IP address or a host name is used to designate the authentication server for SMB
authentication, even if the domain name is incorrect, the authentication succeeds if the correct
user name and passcode are entered.
Files on the Computer
If a network error occurred or the machine or the computer is disconnected during the SMB
transmission, a part of the transferred file is stored in the computer. To delete this file, delete it
manually.
If there is a file with the same name exists on the computer, the file on the computer is
overwritten with the file sent from the machine.
Notes and Restrictions for Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port9100)

This section describes notes and restrictions to observe when using TCP/IP (LPD/Port9100).
Configuration on the Machine
The setting of subnet mask and gateway addresses may be required depending on the network
environment. Consult your network administrator and configure the required settings.
Configuration on the Computer
When setting the network such as IP addresses with a host used under the Network Information
Service (NIS), consult your NIS administrator.
While Printing
When you change a computer's IP address or a computer name, queries and cancel processes
submitted from the machine are no longer executed correctly. Thus, turn the machine off and on when
there is no print data in the receiving buffer.
Note You can use the machine's control panel to cancel printing of the current print data in the
machine's receiving buffer but not printing of pending print data.
Communication Restriction by IP Address
If IPv4/IPv6 address which allows communication is registered on the machine, it may be impossible to
communicate with the registered address. In this case, specify the fixed IPv4/IPv6 address on the host
and set the same address on the machine as the address to be permitted the communication.

User Guide
14-17
Appendix
Notes and Restrictions for IPv6 Connection

This section describes notes and restrictions to observe when using IPv6 connection.
You can only use the following operating system versions to print in an IPv6 environment:
Windows XP
Windows Vista
Windows 7
Windows Server 2008
Windows Server 2008 R2
Windows 8
Windows Server 2012
Note IPv6 must be installed on Windows XP computers.
Some features of SMB are not supported (If you attempt to use services with a NetBIOS name,
communication may not be available in some environment).
IPv6-in-IPv4-tunneling in the machine itself is not supported.
Note If IP Mode is set to IPv6, the IPv6-inIPv4-tunneling cannot be performed.
Communication problems may occur when multiple routers exist on the same subnet.
The network settings of the DNS server or a server used by the machine may cause performance
problems when using services in a dual stack environment.
Automatically set IPv6 addresses and IPv6 DNS server addresses may be unavailable addresses.
"Unavailable IPv6 addresses" mean site-local addresses (fec0::) or addresses with the IPv6
documentation prefix (2001:db8::/32).
IPv4 DNS information can sometimes be used directly after machine startup if the IP operation
mode is Dual Stack, DNS information has been set for both IPv4 and IPv6, and the machine is
communicating with a device specified using an FQDN.
The address displayed as the machine's IP address may change.
For example, in Dual Stack mode, either the IPv4 address or IPv6 address may not be displayed, or
a different IPv6 address may be displayed.
When IPv6 is enabled and IPv4 is disabled on the machine, you cannot specify a storage location
for the Browse feature of the Scan to PC (SMB) function.
In the following cases, the machine may not be able to identify whether addresses are for the
same device, so may not be able to execute status check (lpq) or cancel (lprm) commands for user
print jobs executed by LPD.
When simultaneously operating IPv4 and IPv6 addresses with the same host
When simultaneously operating multiple IPv6 addresses with the same host
IPv6 addresses may not be correctly recorded on job logs. Use an IPv4 network for correct logging.
When searching a device outside the router via SMB, directly specify the address. Multicasting is
supported only within a local link (FF02::1).
In an IPv6 network environment without a DNS server, authentication fails when a computer
name is specified in the SMB server settings for SMB authentication. Specify an IPv6 address
directly as the authentication server's computer name.
14-18

User Guide
Appendix
Fax Activity Report

Fax Activity Report lets you check whether fax send and receive operations ended normally. For each
fax sent or received, the reports record the sender or recipient name and the transmission result/status.
For information on how to print the fax activity report, refer to Printing Reports/Lists on page 10-7.

User Guide
14-19
Appendix
Sent
Item
Description
No.
The serial number of each outgoing fax.
Job#
A document number appended automatically when the fax job is received.
Remote Terminal
The sender's information, in the following priority order:

1. Name registered in Speed Dial number5/8/15(Only when the recipient has a
registered Speed Dial number.)
2. Phone number used when all digits are dialed
3. Remote ID
4. Communication mode
The Remote ID is the phone number sent by the recipient.
Start Time
The time at which transmission began.

For a fax broadcast, the time at which the first transmission started.
Dura.
The amount of time that was required from transmission start to end. For a fax
broadcast, this is the total transmission time for all recipients.
Groups
For a fax broadcast, the number of fax broadcasts is recorded. They are recorded with
number of completed fax broadcasts on the left of the slash (/) and the total number
of fax broadcast recipients to the right of the slash (/).
Pages
The number of pages sent.

The number on the left of the slash (/) is the number of pages sent normally. The
number on the right of the slash(/) is the total number of scanned pages.
This is left empty for fax broadcasts.
Mode
The mode used for the transmission.

G3, ECM, SG3 (Super G3), BC (fax broadcast), or [blank] (no information)
Contents
The transmission content.

BC (fax broadcast), Forward (forwarded fax), or [blank] (normal transmission)
Result
The transmission result.

Done (normal end), Busy (recipient line was busy or the set number of Redials was
exceeded), Cancelled (job was cancelled), Check Remote (communication failed), XXXXXX (communication error)
Total
14-20
"Cancelled" indicates that the user cancelled the job.

The Remote ID is the phone number sent by the recipient.
"XXX-XXX" indicates an error code.
The total number of pages sent.

User Guide
Appendix
Received
Item
Description
No.
The serial number of each incoming fax.
Job#
A document number appended automatically when the fax job is received.
Remote Terminal
The sender's information, in the following priority order:

1. Remote ID
2. Communication mode
Remote ID is the sender's phone number.
Start Time
The time at which the incoming fax was received.
Dura.
The amount of time that was required from transmission start to end.
Pages
The number of pages received.
Mode
The mode used for the transmission.

G3, ECM, SG3 (Super G3), [blank] (no information)
Contents
The transmission content.

Polling (incoming Remote Polling), Forward (forwarded fax), [blank] (normal
transmission)
Result
The transmission result.

Done (normal end), XXX-XXX (transmission error)
"XXX-XXX" indicates an error code.
Total
The total number of pages received.

User Guide
14-21
Appendix
14-22

User Guide
Index
Copy button, 3-11

copy functions, 14-2
copying problems, 13-12
D
Numerics
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX interface, 3-4
2 sided, 5-16, 7-18
2 Sided button, 3-12
A
account modes, 3-20
Multiple Account mode, 3-20
No Account mode, 3-20
Single Account mode, 3-20
Address Book button, 3-12
address book editor, 2-38
Address Book tab, 2-33
adjusting foot, 3-4
automatic paper selection, 4-5
B
Back button, 3-12
bypass tray, 3-3
C
C (Clear) button, 3-12
capacity, 14-8
center tray, 3-2
CentreWare Internet Services, 2-19
changing paper size, 4-9
checking consumables, 10-1
cleaning the machine, 12-12
ClearAll button, 3-12
coding methods, 14-8
collate, 5-17
Collated/Resolution button, 3-12
color mode, 7-20
common tasks, 2-35
connectivity, 14-5, 14-7
continuous copy, 14-3
continuous copy speed, 14-3
continuous print speed, 14-5
control panel, 3-2, 3-11
control panel language, 9-4

User Guide
Data indicator, 3-12

defaults, 2-29
Dial Pause button, 3-12
dimensions, 14-4
dimensions/weight, 14-8, 14-9
document cover, 3-2
document feeder, 5-1, 7-1
document feeder cover, 3-6
document feeder tray, 3-6
document glass, 3-2, 5-3, 7-3
document guides, 3-6, 5-2, 7-2
document jam, 13-54
document output tray, 3-6
document stopper, 3-6, 5-3, 6-3, 7-3
drum cartridge, 3-5
drum status, 10-2
duplex automatic document feeder, 3-6, 14-8
duplex output unit, 14-9
E
e-mail header and body settings, 2-14
Energy Saver button, 3-12
energy saver mode
entering, 3-9
exiting, 3-10
energy saver modes, 3-9
energy saver settings, 2-21
entering energy saver mode, 3-9
error codes, 13-32
Error History report, 10-7
Error indicator, 3-12
Ethernet, 2-22
Ethernet interface, 2-5
exit System Administration mode, 9-3
exiting energy saver mode, 3-10
F
Fax button, 3-13
fax functions, 14-8
fax kit, 14-11
feeding speed, 14-8
file format, 7-20
I-1
Index
first copy output time, 14-2

front cover, 3-2
fusing unit, 3-5
H
halftone, 14-2
HTTP, 2-29
I
ID Card Copy, 5-10
ID Card Copy button, 3-11
image quality problems, 13-6
inner cover, 3-6
installing the scan driver, 2-37
interface cables, 2-4
IP Address (IPv4), 2-6
IP Address (IPv6), 2-7
IP filtering, 2-31
N
narrow glass strip, 3-6
network kit, 14-11
network kit (PCL), 14-11
network related problems, 13-25
No Account mode, 3-20
number of fax lines, 14-8
numeric keypad, 3-12
Job Counter report, 10-7

Job History report, 10-7
Job Status button, 11-3
job templates, 2-30
one touch panels, 3-13

One Tray Module, 3-2
one tray module, 14-9, 14-11
one tray module cover, 3-3
operating system, 14-5
optional components, 14-11
original - binding position, 5-22
original paper size, 14-2, 14-5, 14-7, 14-8
original size, 5-20, 7-21
original type, 5-15, 7-17
Original Type button, 3-13
outline view, 3-13
output paper size, 14-2, 14-5
output paper weight, 14-2
output tray capacity, 14-3
left cover, 3-3

lighten/darken, 5-14, 7-16
Lighten/Darken button, 3-13
Line 1, 3-4
loading paper, 4-1, 4-5
locking casters, 3-2
Log In/Out button, 3-12, 9-1, 12-10
Low Power mode, 3-9
LPD, 2-11, 2-27
pages per side, 5-20

paper clip tray, 3-13
paper jams, 13-45
paper size, 14-9
paper supply, 5-17
paper tray capacity, 14-3
paper types, 4-1
paper weight, 14-9
PDL, 14-5
port settings, 2-22
Port9100, 2-11, 2-27
power consumption, 14-4
power cord connector, 3-4
power source, 3-7
power supply, 14-3
power switch, 3-4
print driver, 2-37
installing, 2-37
uninstalling, 2-38
print functions, 14-5
print resolution, 14-5
M
machine problems, 13-2
Machine Status button, 3-12
machine weight, 14-4
management, 2-35
managing the copy paper with accounting, 5-24
memory, 14-2
Multiple Account mode, 3-20
I-2

User Guide
Index
printable area, 14-10

printer problems, 13-15
printing, 8-2
printing resolution, 14-2
Properties tab, 2-21
protocol, 14-5
Q
Quick-Buttons, 3-14
R
Receive (Manual), 6-27
recording paper size, 14-8
reduce/enlarge, 5-19
reduction/enlargement, 14-2
replacing consumables, 12-1
replacing the drum cartridge, 12-7
replacing the toner cartridge, 12-3
reports, 10-7
resolution, 7-19
S
Scan button, 3-13
scan driver, 2-37, 2-38
uninstalling, 2-38
scan functions
local, 14-5
network, 14-7
scan problems, 13-20
scan to e-mail, 14-7
scan to PC, 14-6, 14-7
scanning halftone, 14-6, 14-7
scanning resolution, 14-2, 14-5, 14-7, 14-8
scanning speed, 14-6, 14-7
Send (Manual), 6-26
send document size, 14-8
send e-mail, 2-11
Service Settings report, 10-7
Single Account mode, 3-20
Sleep mode, 3-9
SMB, 2-11
SMTP server, 2-28
SMTP server settings, 2-13
SNMP, 2-11
SNMP configuration, 2-24
space requirement, 14-4
specifications, 14-1

User Guide
speed dial, 6-16

Speed Dial button, 3-12
stand, 14-11
Start button, 3-12
Stop button, 3-12
storing and handling paper, 4-4
Support tab, 2-33
supported paper type, 4-2
switching the power off, 3-7
switching the power on, 3-7
System Administration mode, 9-1
system administrator settings, 2-32
System Settings report, 10-7
T
TCP/IP, 2-22
Tel, 3-4
toner cartridge, 3-5
toner status, 10-1
transmission mode, 14-8
transmission speed, 14-8
transmission time, 14-8
Tray 1, 3-2
Tray 2, 3-2
Tray 3, 3-2
Tray 4, 3-2
tray lock, 14-11
troubleshooting, 13-1
two tray module, 14-9, 14-11
two tray module cover, 3-2
U
unusable paper, 4-3
usable paper, 4-3
USB interface, 2-4, 3-4
V
view all names, 2-33
W
warm-up time, 14-2
X
Xerox CentreWare Internet Services, 2-19
I-3
Index
I-4

User Guide

wc5022-5024 User Guide En-Us

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

wc5022-5024 User Guide En-Us

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

February 2015

Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024

Before Using the Machine

Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 Multifunction Printer

Setting the Send E-mail Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 Multifunction Printer

Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 Multifunction Printer

Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 Multifunction Printer

Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 Multifunction Printer

Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34

Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 Multifunction Printer

Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 Multifunction Printer

Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 Multifunction Printer

Fax Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19

Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 Multifunction Printer

Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 Multifunction Printer

Before Using the

Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 Multifunction Printer

Before Using the Machine

Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 Multifunction Printer

Before Using the Machine

Using this Guide

Organization of this Guide

Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 Multifunction Printer

Before Using the Machine

The following terms are used in this guide:

A cross-reference included in this guide.

Folders, files, applications, button or menu names displayed on the

Hardware buttons on the control panel.

Keys on the keyboard of the computer.

Path to a certain item within a procedure on the control panel.

Orientation of documents or paper is described in this guide as follows:

Loading the document or paper in portrait orientation when

Loading the document or paper in landscape orientation when

Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 Multifunction Printer

Before Using the Machine

High risk of severe or fatal injury if not followed

Risk of severe or fatal injury if not followed

Risk of injury to user or damage to machine if

Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 Multifunction Printer

Before Using the Machine

Do not place any object on the power cord.

Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 Multifunction Printer

Before Using the Machine

Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 Multifunction Printer

Before Using the Machine

Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 Multifunction Printer

Before Using the Machine

Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 Multifunction Printer

Before Using the Machine

Do not insert any object into slots or openings of this product.

Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 Multifunction Printer

Before Using the Machine

Location of Warning and Caution Labels

Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 Multifunction Printer

Before Using the Machine

Product Safety Certification (UL, CB)

Xerox WorkCentre 5022/5024 Multifunction Printer

Before Using the Machine

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2006, Daniel Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>.

All rights reserved.

The FreeBSD Copyright